You are on page 1of 453

2016 NISSAN ROGUE

2016 ROGUE
OWNER’S MANUAL

Printing : November 2015 (06)

T32-D
Publication No.: OM0E
OM16EA0L32U2
0T32U1
Printed in U.S.A. For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
T00UM-JM03D T32-D

2209776-Rogue-OM-Cover.indd 1 10/12/15 2:29 PM


FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle Before driving your vehicle, please read this
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with and/or accessory. See a NISSAN dealer for de- Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-
confidence. It was produced using the latest tails concerning the particular accessories with iarity with controls and maintenance require-
techniques and strict quality control. which your vehicle is equipped. ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.
This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your WARNING
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
manual before operating your vehicle. REMINDERS!
A separate Warranty Information Booklet Follow these important driving rules to
explains details about the warranties cov- help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service for you and your passengers!
and Maintenance Guide” explains details ● NEVER drive under the influence of al-
about maintaining and servicing your ve- cohol or drugs.
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will ● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
explain how to resolve any concerns you and never drive too fast for conditions.
may have with your vehicle, and clarify your ● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
rights under your state’s lemon law. and avoid using vehicle features or taking
A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. other actions that could distract you.
When you require any service or have any ques- ● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
tions, they will be glad to assist you with the priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
extensive resources available to them. children should be seated in the rear seat.
In addition to factory-installed options, your ve- ● ALWAYS provide information about the
hicle may also be equipped with additional ac- proper use of vehicle safety features to
cessories installed by NISSAN or by a NISSAN all occupants of the vehicle.
dealer prior to delivery. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings, ● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
cautions and instructions concerning proper use for important safety information.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL

For descriptions specified for all-wheel drive MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This manual includes information for all features
models, an AWD mark is placed at the beginning and equipment available on this model. Features
of the applicable sections/items. This vehicle should not be modified. and equipment in your vehicle may vary depend-
Modification could affect its ing on model, trim level, options selected, order,
As with other vehicles with features for performance, safety or durability and may date of production, region or availability. There-
off-road use, failure to operate all-wheel even violate governmental regulations. In fore, you may find information about features or
drive models correctly may result in loss of
addition, damage or performance prob- equipment that are not included or installed on
control or an accident. Be sure to read
lems resulting from modifications may your vehicle.
“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-
not be covered under NISSAN warranties.
ing and driving” section of this manual. All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV- printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
ING specifications, performance, design or compo-
This vehicle will handle and maneuver nent suppliers without notice and without obliga-
differently from an ordinary passenger tion. From time to time, NISSAN may update or
car because it has a higher center of revise this manual to provide Owners with the
gravity for off-road use. As with other most accurate information currently available.
vehicles with features of this type, fail- Please carefully read and retain with this manual
ure to operate this vehicle correctly may all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to
ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-
result in loss of control or an accident.
date information regarding your vehicle. Current
For additional information, refer to “On- versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
pavement and off-road driving updates can also be found in the Owner section
precautions”, “Avoiding collision and of the NISSAN website at
rollover” and “Driving safety precau- https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
tions” in the “Starting and driving” sec- navigation/manualsGuide. If you have ques-
tion of this manual. tions concerning any information in your Owner’s
Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See
the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
page in this Owner’s Manual for contact informa-
tion.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
THIS MANUAL WARNING
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways: WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
WARNING and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of
This is used to indicate the presence of a
California to cause cancer and birth de-
hazard that could cause death or serious
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
risk, the procedures must be followed
and certain products of component wear
precisely.
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
CAUTION birth defects or other reproductive harm.
APD1005
This is used to indicate the presence of a If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
hazard that could cause minor or moder- CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
or “Do not let this happen.”
ate personal injury or damage to your ve- ADVISORY
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-
cedures must be followed carefully.
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra- ies, may contain perchlorate material. The
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
vehicle. Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these BLUETOOTH® is a


indicate movement or action. trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these Visteon and Bosch.
call attention to an item in the illustration.
SiriusXM® services
require a subscription
after trial period and
are sold separately or
as a package. The
satellite service is
available only in the
48 contiguous USA
and DC. SiriusXM
satellite service is
also available in
Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.

© 2015 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.


All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to following information:
For U.S. customers
provide NISSAN directly with comments or Nissan North America, Inc.
– Your name, address, and telephone number
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con- Consumer Affairs Department
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free – Vehicle identification number (attached to the P.O. Box 685003
number: top of the instrument panel on the driver’s Franklin, TN 37068-5003
side) or via e-mail at:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1 – Date of purchase nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
(1-800-647-7261) For Canadian customers
– Current odometer reading
Nissan Canada Inc.
For Canadian customers
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name 5290 Orbitor Drive
1-800-387-0122
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
– Your comments or questions or via e-mail at:
OR information.centre@nissancanada.com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical and consumer information 9
Index 10
0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags


(P. 1-46)
2. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-46)
3. Seat belts (P. 1-15, 1-46)
4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-10)
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-46)
6. 2nd row center position top tether strap
(located on ceiling) (P. 1-25)
7. Folding 3rd row bench (if so equipped)
(P. 1-2)
8. 2nd row outboard seat top tether strap
anchor (located on bottom of seatback)
(P. 1-25)
9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-25)
10. Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2)
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-46)
12. Seats (P. 1-2)
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.

LII2305

0-2 Illustrated table of contents


EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Front view camera (if so equipped)


(P. 4-16)
2. Engine hood (P. 3-23)
3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-34)
Wiper blades (P. 8-18)
4. Windshield (P. 8-18)
Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-13)
5. Power windows (P. 2-56)
6. Door locks(P. 3-5)
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
(if so equipped) (P. 3-11)
NISSAN Jackknife key (if so equipped)
(P. 3-7)
Keys (P. 3-2)
7. Mirrors (P. 3-35)
Side view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-16)
8. Tire pressure (P. 8-30)
9. Flat tire (P. 6-3)
10. Tire chains (P. 8-30)
11. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-37)
12. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-37)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.
LII2306

Illustrated table of contents 0-3


EXTERIOR REAR

1. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-34)


2. Antenna (P. 4-75)
3. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)
4. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-31)
5. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-31)
Fuel recommendation (P. 9-2)
6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
7. Rearview camera (P. 4-10, 4-16)
8. Liftgate release (P. 3-24)
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.

LII2307

0-4 Illustrated table of contents


PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1. Glove box (P. 2-48)


2. Map lights (P. 2-61)
3. Console box (P. 2-48)
4. Power panoramic moonroof
(if so equipped) (P. 2-59)
5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-48)
6. Center armrest (2nd row) (P. 1-2)
7. Seats (P. 1-2)
8. Cup holders (P. 2-48)
9. Sun visors (P. 3-34)
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.

LII2308

Illustrated table of contents 0-5


INSTRUMENT PANEL

6. Vent (P. 4-31)


7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
8. Radio (P. 4-42)
Navigation system*(if so equipped)
(P. 4-4)
9. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 2-32)
10. Glove box (P. 2-48)
11. Heater and air conditioning controls
(P. 4-32)
12. Power outlet (P. 2-46)
13. Shift lever (P. 5-19)
14. Auxiliary jack (P. 4-61)
USB port (P. 4-61)
15. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 2-32)
16. Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-32)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(P. 4-42)
LIC2626 17. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-46)
Horn (P. 2-41)
1. Vent (P. 4-31) 4. Wiper and washer switch, rear wiper
18. Control panel and vehicle information
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn washer switch (P. 2-34)
display switches (P. 2-19)
signal switch (P. 2-37) 5. Ignition switch (if so equipped)
19. Hood release (P. 3-23)
3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) (P. 5-11)
Fuel door release (P. 3-31)
Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-10) Push-button ignition switch
Vehicle information display (P. 2-19) (if so equipped) (P. 5-13)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-43)
SPORT mode switch (P. 5-22)
ECO mode switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-22)
Warning system switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-45)
Power liftgate switch (if so equipped)
(P. 3-24)
Power liftgate main switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-24)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-43)
Hill descent control switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-44)
21. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-37)
Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-3)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7


ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS

QR25DE engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
4. Battery (P. 8-13)
5. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)
6. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-21)
7. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
9. Drive belt location (P. 8-16)
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-13)
Engine cover removed for clarity.
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details.

LDI2809

0-8 Illustrated table of contents


WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page


light light light

Anti-lock Braking 2-11 Low tire pressure 2-12 All-Wheel Drive 2-16
System (ABS) warn- warning light (AWD) LOCK indi-
or ing light cator light (if so
Low windshield- 2-14 equipped)
washer fluid warning
light (if so equipped) ECO mode indicator 2-15
Blind Spot Warning 2-11 light (if so equipped)
(BSW) warning light Master warning light 2-14
(if so equipped) Front fog light indi- 2-16
cator light (if so
Brake warning light 2-11 Power steering 2-14 equipped)
warning light
or Front passenger air 2-16
Seat belt warning 2-15 bag status light
light and chime
High beam indicator 2-16
Charge warning 2-12 Supplemental air 2-15 light (blue)
light bag warning light
Hill descent control 2-16
Forward Emergency 2-12 system ON indicator
Braking (FEB) sys- light (if so equipped)
tem warning light (if
so equipped) Malfunction Indica- 2-16
tor Light (MIL)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9


Indicator Name Page
light

Overdrive OFF indi- 2-17


cator light

Security indicator 2-17


light

Side light and head- 2-18


light indicator light
(green)

Slip indicator light 2-17

SPORT mode indi- 2-18


cator light

Turn signal/hazard 2-18


indicator lights

Vehicle Dynamic 2-18


Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

0-10 Illustrated table of contents


1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22


Front manual seat adjustment Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Front power seat adjustment Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Adjustable head restraint/headrest CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Forward-facing child restraint installation
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Forward-facing child restraint installation
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
SEATS

● Do not leave children unattended inside


the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
● To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assis-
tance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-
ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
ARS1152 cause a significant risk of injury or
death to people and pets.
WARNING ● For the most effective protection when
● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when driving so full attention may be given to
be upright. Always sit well back and
the seatback is reclined. This can be vehicle operation. The seat may move
upright in the seat with both feet on the
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not suddenly and could cause loss of con-
floor and adjust the seat properly. For
be against your body. In an accident, trol of the vehicle.
additional information, refer to “Pre-
you could be thrown into it and receive ● The seatback should not be reclined
cautions on seat belt usage” in this
neck or other serious injuries. You any more than needed for comfort. Seat
section.
could also slide under the lap belt and belts are most effective when the pas-
receive serious internal injuries. ● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
senger sits well back and straight up in
to make sure it is securely locked.
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For
additional information about adjusting the seats,
refer to the steps outlined in this section.

LRS2160 LRS2161
Forward and backward Reclining
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
position. to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-
cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,
the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants
to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in the P (Park) position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3


LRS2202 LRS2662
Seat lifter (driver’s seat) FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT Forward and backward
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust (if so equipped) Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
the seat height until the desired position is Operating tips the seat forward or backward to the desired
achieved. position.
● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor Reclining
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds
then reactivate the switch. Move the recline switch backward until the de-
sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
● Do not operate the power seat switch for a forward again, move the switch forward and
long period of time when the engine is off. move your body forward. The seatback will move
This will discharge the battery. forward.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-
cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,
the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants
to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park).

LRS2636 LRS2270
Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
Push the switch up or down to achieve desired The lumbar support feature provides adjustable
seat height. lower back support to the driver. Move the switch
forward or backward to adjust the seatback lum-
bar area.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5


The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-
back for occupants of different sizes for added
comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For
additional information, refer to “Precautions on
seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seat-
back can be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is
in P (Park).

WARNING
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
LRS2717 the seatback is reclined. This can be LRS2713
Outboard seats dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident, ARMRESTS
2ND ROW BENCH SEAT you could be thrown into it and receive The 2nd row center armrest is locked in the up
ADJUSTMENT neck or other serious injuries. You position. To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest
could also slide under the lap belt and strap that is located in the armrest pivot area.
Forward and backward receive serious internal injuries.
Pull the center of the bar 䊊
1 up and hold it while
● For the most effective protection when
To return the armrest to the up position, pull up on
you slide the seat forward or backward to the the armrest until it is locked in the up position.
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat be upright. Always sit well back in the
in position. seat and adjust the seat belt properly.
Reclining For additional information, refer to
“Precautions on seat belt usage” in this
To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever 䊊 2 section.
and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull
the lever 䊊 2 up and lean your body forward.
Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
FLEXIBLE SEATING ● Head restraints/headrests should be
adjusted properly as they may provide
WARNING significant protection against injury in
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo an accident. Always replace and adjust
area or on the rear seats when they are them properly if they have been re-
in the fold-down position. In a collision, moved for any reason.
people riding in these areas without ● If the head restraints/headrests are re-
proper restraints are more likely to be moved for any reason, they should be
seriously injured or killed. securely stored to prevent them from
● Do not allow people to ride in any area causing injury to passengers or damage
of your vehicle that is not equipped with to the vehicle in case of sudden braking
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone or an accident.
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a ● When returning the seatbacks to the
seat belt properly. upright position, be certain they are LRS2752

● Do not allow more than one person to completely secured in the latched posi- Accessing the 3rd row seats (if so
use the same seat belt. tion. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an acci- equipped)
● Do not fold down the rear seats when dent or sudden stop. The 3rd row can be accessed from outside the
occupants are in the rear seat area or
any luggage is on the rear seats. ● Properly secure all cargo to help pre- vehicle by using the seatback release lever lo-
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not cated on the 2nd row seatback. To access the
– Make sure that the seat path is clear place cargo higher than the seatbacks. 3rd row from outside the vehicle:
before moving the seat. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
1. Lower or remove the 2nd row head
– Be careful not to allow hands or feet cargo could cause personal injury.
restraints/headrests and store them prop-
to get caught or pinched in the seat. erly so they are not loose in the vehicle. For
additional information about head
restraint/headrest removal and adjustment,
refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this
section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7


2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat belt 3. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
hooks found on the sides of the vehicle. seating position, push up on the seatback
until it latches in place.
3. Lift up on the seatback release lever 䊊 A
located on the 2nd row seatback and push
the seatback forward. The seatback will stop
at a 45° angle and the slide lock will disen-
gage. This allows the entire seat to slide
forward and an occupant to enter/exit the
3rd row.
4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
seating position, push up on the seatback
until it latches in place.

LRS2753

Folding the 2nd row bench seat (for


vehicles equipped with 3rd row seats)
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum
cargo hauling in vehicles equipped with a 3rd row
seat:
1. Follow steps 1–3 in “Accessing the 3rd row
seats” in this section to begin folding the
seat.
2. Pull the strap 䊊 B on the lower side of the
outboard seats to fold the 2nd row seats
completely flat.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat belt
hooks found on the sides of the vehicle.
3. Lift up on the seatback release lever 䊊
A on
the top of the outboard seats to fold the
seatbacks flat.
4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
seating position, push up on the seatback
until it latches in place.

LRS2754 LRS2348

Folding the 2nd row bench seat (for Folding the 3rd row seats (if so
vehicles not equipped with 3rd row equipped)
seats) To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargo
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum capacity:
cargo hauling in vehicles not equipped with 3rd 1. Make sure the head restraints/headrests are
row seats: all the way down.
1. Lower or remove the 2nd row head 2. Pull the strap 䊊
1 to release the seat.
restraints/headrests and store them prop- 3. Once released, push the seatback forward
erly so they are not loose in the vehicle. For
additional information about head

2 .

restraint/headrest removal and adjustment,


refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this
section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9


HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

To return the 3rd row seats to a seating position:


WARNING
1. Use the pull straps 䊊1 to raise each seat-
Head restraints/headrests supplement
back. Pull back until the seatback latches the other vehicle safety systems. They may
into position. Make sure to properly raise provide additional protection against in-
each seatback to an upright and se- jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust-
cured position. able head restraints/headrests must be
adjusted properly, as specified in this sec-
WARNING tion. Check the adjustment after someone
When the seat is returned to the normal else uses the seat. Do not attach anything
seating position, the head to the head restraint/headrest stalks or
restraints/headrests must be returned to remove the head restraint/headrest. Do
the upright position to properly protect not use the seat if the head
vehicle occupants. restraint/headrest has been removed. If
the head restraint/headrest was removed, LRS2403
reinstall and properly adjust the head 2nd row seating
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position. Failure to fol- The illustration shows the seating positions
low these instructions can reduce the ef- equipped with head restraints/headrests.
fectiveness of the head 䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
restraints/headrests. This may increase a head restraint.
the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. 䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped
with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).
● Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated,
adjustable or non-adjustable.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


– If your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
● If the head restraint/headrest has been re-
moved, ensure that it is reinstalled and
locked in place before riding in that desig-
nated seating position.

LRS2308 LRS2300
3rd row seating (if so equipped) ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
● Adjustable head restraints/headrests have HEADREST COMPONENTS
multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock
them in a desired adjustment position. 1. Removable head restraint/headrest
● The non-adjustable head 2. Multiple notches
restraints/headrests have a single locking 3. Lock knob
notch to secure them to the seat frame.
4. Stalks
● Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the head
restraint/headrest so the center of your
ear is approximately level with the center
of the head restraint/headrest.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11


5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant uses
the seating position.

LRS2299 LRS2302
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD REMOVE
RESTRAINT/HEADREST Use the following procedure to remove the head
COMPONENTS restraint/headrest:
1. Removable head restraint/headrest 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the
2. Single notch highest position.
3. Lock knob 2. Push and hold the lock knob.
4. Stalks 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from
the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in
a secure place so it is not loose in the
vehicle.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351
INSTALL ADJUST For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with For adjustable head restraint/headrest Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-
the holes in the seat. Make sure that the tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center before riding in that designated seating position.
head restraint/headrest is facing the correct
is level with the center of your ears. If your ear
direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)
position is still higher than the recommended
䊊1 must be installed in the hole with the lock
alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at
knob 䊊 2 .
the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13


LRS2305 LRS2306
Raise Lower
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-
tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-
before riding in that designated seating position. tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


SEAT BELTS

SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories specify that seat belts be worn at
all times when a vehicle is being driven.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15


SSS0134 SSS0016

WARNING WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this ● The seat belt should be properly ad-
vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
times. Children should be in the rear reduce the effectiveness of the entire
seats and in an appropriate restraint. restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur if
the seat belt is not worn properly.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely ● Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have ac-
fastened to the proper buckle. tivated, they cannot be reused and must
be replaced together with the retractor.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
See a NISSAN dealer.
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness. ● Removal and installation of preten-
sioner system components should be
● Do not allow more than one person to
done by a NISSAN dealer.
use the same seat belt.
● All seat belt assemblies, including re-
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
tractors and attaching hardware, should
than there are seat belts.
be inspected after any collision by a
● If the seat belt warning light glows con- NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends
tinuously while the ignition is placed in that all seat belt assemblies in use dur-
the ON position with all doors closed ing a collision be replaced unless the
SSS0014 and all seat belts fastened, it may indi- collision was minor and the belts show
cate a malfunction in the system. Have no damage and continue to operate
WARNING the system checked by a NISSAN properly. Seat belt assemblies not in
● Always route the shoulder belt over dealer. use during a collision should also be
your shoulder and across your chest. ● No changes should be made to the seat inspected and replaced if either dam-
Never put the belt behind your back, belt system. For example, do not modify age or improper operation is noted.
under your arm or across your neck. The the seat belt, add material, or install ● All child restraints and attaching hard-
belt should be away from your face and devices that may change the seat belt ware should be inspected after any col-
neck, but not falling off your shoulder. routing or tension. Doing so may affect lision. Always follow the restraint
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as the operation of the seat belt system. manufacturer’s inspection instructions
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE Modifying or tampering with the seat and replacement recommendations.
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could belt system may result in serious per- The child restraints should be replaced
increase the risk of internal injuries in sonal injury. if they are damaged.
an accident.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17


PREGNANT WOMEN ● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
be against your body. In an accident,
always position the lap belt as low as possible
you could be thrown into it and receive
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder neck or other serious injuries. You
belt over your shoulder and across your chest. could also slide under the lap belt and
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab- receive serious internal injuries.
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations. ● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
INJURED PERSONS be upright. Always sit well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on the
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use floor and adjust the seat belt properly.
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
LRS0786
recommendations. ● Do not allow children to play with the
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT seat belts. Most seating positions are
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are WITH RETRACTOR tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
equipped with a seat belt warning light. The belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
warning light, located on the instrument panel, WARNING neck with the ALR mode activated, the
will show the status of the driver and passenger child can be seriously injured or killed if
seat belt. ● Every person who drives or rides in this the seat belt retracts and becomes
vehicle should use a seat belt at all tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
NOTE: times. is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to
release the child. If the seat belt cannot
The front passenger seat belt warning light be unbuckled or is already unbuckled,
will not light up if the seat is not occupied. release the child by cutting the seat belt
For additional information, refer to “Warning with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in scissors) to release the seat belt.
the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2160 LRS2662
Manual front seat shown (if so equipped) Power front seat shown (if so equipped)
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information,
refer to “Seats” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19


freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks
the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly
or during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the
seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-
tion.
The ALR mode should be used only for
LRS2674 LRS2675
child restraint installation. During normal
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor 3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
and insert the tongue into the buckle 䊊A until on the hips 䊊 B as shown. should not be activated. If it is activated, it
you hear and feel the latch engage. may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the sion. It can also change the operation of
● The retractor is designed to lock dur- retractor to take up extra slack 䊊
C . Be sure
the front passenger air bag. For additional
ing a sudden stop or on impact. A the shoulder belt is routed over your shoul-
slow pulling motion permits the seat information, refer to “Front passenger air
der and across your chest. bag and status light” in this section.
belt to move and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat. The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two modes WARNING
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from of operation:
its fully retracted position, firmly pull When fastening the seat belts, be certain
the belt and release it. Then ● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) that the seatbacks are completely secured
smoothly pull the belt out of the re- in the latched position. If they are not
● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) completely secured, passengers may be
tractor.
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and injured in an accident or sudden stop.
retract to allow the driver and passengers some
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139 LRS0242
Unfastening the seat belts Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the seats)
buckle 䊊1 . The seat belt automatically retracts.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
Checking seat belt operation justed to the position best for you. For additional
information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt usage” in this section. To adjust, pull out the
movement by two separate methods: adjustment button 䊊 1 and move the shoulder belt
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the anchor to the desired position 䊊 2 , so the belt
retractor passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt
should be away from your face and neck, but not
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly
falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment
button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into posi-
tion.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21


● 2nd and 3rd row seating position
WARNING
● After adjustment, release the adjust- See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-
ment button and try to move the shoul- chasing an extender if an extender is required.
der belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position. WARNING
● The shoulder belt anchor height should ● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
be adjusted to the position best for you. by the same company which made the
Failure to do so may reduce the effec- original equipment seat belts, should
tiveness of the entire restraint system be used with NISSAN seat belts.
and increase the chance or severity of ● Adults and children who can use the
injury in an accident. standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
LRS2157
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
3rd row shown; 2nd row similar
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
Seat belt hook child restraints. If the child restraint is
When the seat belt is not in use and when folding not secured properly, the child could be
down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on seriously injured or killed in a collision
the seat belt hooks. or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE


If, because of body size or driving position, it is ● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt mild soap solution or any solution recom-
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
the installed seat belts is available for purchase. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
of length and are available for the: seat belts to retract until they are completely
● Driver and front passenger seating position dry.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


CHILD SAFETY

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt There are three basic types of child restraint
WARNING
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat systems:
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder Do not allow children to play with the seat
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. belts. Most seating positions are ● Rear-facing child restraints
equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac- ● Forward-facing child restraints
● Periodically check to see that the seat tor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt
belt and the metal components, such as becomes wrapped around a child’s neck ● Booster seats
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires with the ALR mode activated, the child can
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
be seriously injured or killed if the seat Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the belt retracts and becomes tight. This can
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as- than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
occur even if the vehicle is parked. Un- child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
sembly should be replaced. buckle the seat belt to release the child. If are available for children who outgrow rear-
the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
already unbuckled, release the child by Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
(such as a knife or scissors) to release the use a forward-facing child restraint.
seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them. WARNING
They need to be properly restrained. Infants and children need special protec-
In addition to the general information in this tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
manual, child safety information is available from them properly. The shoulder belt may
many other sources, including doctors, teachers, come too close to the face or neck. The lap
government traffic safety offices, and community belt may not fit over their small hip bones.
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure In an accident, an improperly fitting seat
to learn the best way to transport your child. belt could cause serious or fatal injury.
Always use appropriate child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-
ries require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by SMALL CHILDREN so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and across the chest and the top, middle portion of
Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross
seat belt. For additional information, refer to 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul-
“Child restraints” in this section. restraint as long as possible up to the height or der. The lap belt should lie snugly across the
weight limit of the child restraint. Children who lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing booster seat can only be used in seating posi-
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be tions that have a three-point type seat belt. The
Studies show that children are safer when
secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions a label certifying that it complies with Federal
the front seat.
for minimum and maximum weight and height rec- Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-
This is especially important because your ommendations. NISSAN recommends that small tor Vehicle Safety Standards.
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- children be placed in child restraints that comply A booster seat should be used until the child can
tem (air bag system) for the front passen- with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or pass the seat belt fit test below:
ger. For additional information, refer to Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You
“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle ● Are the child’s back and hips against the
this section. vehicle seatback?
and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions
INFANTS for installation and use. ● Is the child able to sit without slouching?
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed LARGER CHILDREN ● Do the child’s knees bend easily over the
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- front edge of the seat with feet flat on the
mends that infants be placed in child restraints Children should remain in a forward-facing child floor?
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi-
mum height or weight limit allowed by the child ● Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety belt low and snug across the hips and shoul-
Standards. You should choose a child restraint restraint manufacturer.
der belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit
facturer’s instructions for installation and use. of the harness-equipped forward-facing child re- ● Is the child able to use the properly adjusted
straint, NISSAN recommends that the child be head restraint/headrest?
placed in a commercially available booster seat to ● Will the child be able to stay in position for
obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit the entire ride?
properly, the booster seat should raise the child
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CHILD RESTRAINTS

NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow dif-
ferent guidelines. Check local and state
regulations to confirm your child is using
the correct restraint system before travel-
ing.

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat
and do not allow a child in the cargo area.
The child could be seriously injured or
killed in a sudden stop or collision.

LRS2690 ARS1098
If you answered no to any of these questions, the PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
child should remain in a booster seat using a RESTRAINTS
three-point type seat belt.
WARNING
● Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25


– NISSAN recommends that all child – Child restraint anchorages are de-
restraints be installed in the rear signed to withstand only those loads
seat. Studies show that children are imposed by correctly fitted child re-
safer when properly restrained in the straints. Under no circumstances are
rear seat than in the front seat. If you they to be used to attach adult seat
must install a forward-facing child belts, or other items or equipment to
restraint in the front seat, refer to the vehicle. Doing so could damage
“Forward-facing child restraint in- the child restraint anchorages. The
stallation using the seat belts” in this child restraint will not be properly
section. installed using the damaged anchor-
age, and a child could be seriously
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
injured or killed in a collision.
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front seat. – Never use the anchor points for adult
WRS0256 An inflating air bag could seriously seat belts or harnesses.
injure or kill a child. A rear-facing
– A child restraint with a top tether
– Infants and children should never be child restraint must only be used in
strap should not be used in the front
held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron- the rear seat.
passenger seat.
gest adult cannot resist the forces of
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
a collision. – Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
that will fit the child and vehicle.
sible after fitting the child restraint.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a Some child restraints may not fit
child and another passenger. properly in your vehicle. – Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child re-
straint while in the vehicle.
● When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, loose objects can injure occupants
or damage the vehicle.

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


● If the child restraint is compatible with your
CAUTION
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can and check the various adjustments to be
become very hot. Check the seating sur- sure the child restraint is compatible with
face and buckles before placing a child in your child. Choose a child restraint that is
the child restraint. designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH ● If the combined weight of the child and child
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys- restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or may use either the LATCH anchors or the
webbing-mounted attachments that can be con- seat belt to install the child restraint (not both
nected to these anchors. For additional informa- at the same time).
tion, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Teth- ● If the combined weight of the child and child
ers for CHildren) system” in this section. restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use LRS2137
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- LATCH system lower anchor locations -
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
chors) to install the child restraint. bench seat
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
● Be sure to follow the child restraint manufac- LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for turer’s instructions for installation.
infants and children of various sizes. When se- for CHildren) SYSTEM
lecting any child restraint, keep the following All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points in mind: territories require that infants and small points that are used with LATCH system compat-
children be restrained in an approved child ible child restraints. This system may also be
● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying restraint at all times while the vehicle is referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle being operated. Canadian law requires the system. With this system, you do not have to use
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor top tether strap on forward-facing child re- a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint
Vehicle Safety Standard 213. straints be secured to the designated an- unless the combined weight of the child and child
chor point on the vehicle. restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the com-
● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat bined weight of the child and child restraint is
and seat belt system. greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s
seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint – Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
manufacturer’s instructions for installation. ing your fingers into the lower anchor
The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to area. Feel to make sure there are no
install child restraints in the following positions obstructions over the anchors such
only: as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
● 2nd row bench seat – outboard seating be secured properly if the lower an-
positions chors are obstructed.
LATCH lower anchor – Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
WARNING imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc- they to be used to attach adult seat
tions for proper use and installation of belts, or other items or equipment to WRS0700
child restraints could result in serious in- the vehicle. Doing so could damage
jury or death of a child or other passen- LATCH lower anchor location
the child restraint anchorages. The
gers in a sudden stop or collision: child restraint will not be properly LATCH lower anchor locations
– Attach LATCH system compatible installed using the damaged anchor- The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear
child restraints only at the locations ages, and a child could be seriously of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
shown in the illustration. injured or killed in a collision. attached to the seatback to help you locate the
– Do not secure a child restraint in the LATCH lower anchors.
2nd row center position using the
LATCH system anchors. The child re-
straint will not be secured properly.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


LRS2718 LRS0661 LRS0662
LATCH label locations 2nd row bench LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH lower When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
anchor attachments those supplied with the child restraint.
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
structions provided by the child restraint manu-
facturer.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29


Top tether anchor A child restraint with a top tether strap should
only be placed in the center position of the 2nd
WARNING row if there are no 3rd row occupants.
● Do not allow cargo to contact the top Rearward adjustment of the 2nd row bench seat
tether strap when it is attached to the will result in loosening of the top tether strap for
top tether anchor. Properly secure the the center position of the 2nd row. Avoid moving
cargo so it does not contact the top the 2nd row bench seat or retighten the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not properly tether strap following rearward movement of the
secured or cargo that contacts the top 2nd row bench seat.
tether strap may damage it during a
collision. A child could be seriously in- If you have any questions when installing a top
jured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap, consult a NISSAN dealer for details.
tether strap is damaged.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
● Child restraint anchorages are de- LRS2714
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
signed to withstand only those loads 2nd row bench seat
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are

1 Top tether strap For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
they to be used to attach adult seat 䊊
2 Anchor point restraint” sections of this manual before installing
belts, or other items or equipment to a child restraint.
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the Top tether anchor point locations
child restraint anchorages. The child re- Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
Anchor points are located in the following loca-
straint will not be properly installed us- weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
tions:
ing the damaged anchorages, and a 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
child could be seriously injured or killed ● 2nd row bench on the bottom of the seat- child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
in a collision. back in the seating positions shown. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
● Roof above the rear cargo area.
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
The top tether anchor located in the roof is only to instructions for installation.
be used for a child restraint located in the center
position of the 2nd row.
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH
system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.

WRS0801 WRS0802
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31


5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
LRS0673 LRS0674 use the ALR mode will result in the child
Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4 restraint not being properly secured. The
3. For child restraints that are equipped with 4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- restraint could tip over or be loose and
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any fore you place the child in it. Push it from side cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
additional slack from the anchor attach- to side while holding the child restraint near collision.
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly the LATCH attachment path. The child re- For additional information, refer to all Warnings
in the center of the child restraint with your straint should not move more than 1 inch and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it restraints” sections of this manual before install-
and seatback while tightening the webbing forward and check to see if the LATCH at-
ing a child restraint.
of the anchor attachments. tachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
in another seat and test it again. You may 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
need to try a different child restraint or try child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
types of vehicles.
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:

WRS0256 WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 1 Rear-facing – step 2
1. Child restraints for infants must be 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
used in the rear-facing direction and restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
therefore must not be used in the front hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
Always follow the child restraint manufactur- structions for belt routing.
er’s instructions.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33


LRS2395 LRS2396 WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4 Rear-facing – step 5
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It the center of the child restraint to compress
reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
is fully retracted. pulling up on the seat belt.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1 LATCH system:
through 6.
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
After the child restraint is removed and the seat ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint er’s instructions.
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
LRS2397 restraints” sections of this manual before install-
Rear-facing – step 6 ing a child restraint.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- Do not use the lower anchors if the combined
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds
to side while holding the child restraint near 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the
the seat belt path. The child restraint should child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat instructions for installation.
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35


If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.

LRS2398 LRS2399
Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2 Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- 3. The back of the child restraint should be
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check secured against the vehicle seatback.
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop- If necessary, adjust or remove the head
erly attached to the lower anchors. restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
If the child restraint is equipped with a top restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is
tether strap, route the top tether strap and removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor to reinstall the head restraint/headrest
point. For additional information, refer to “In- when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information about head
stalling top tether strap” in this section.
restraint/headrest adjustment, refer to
Do not install child restraints that require the “Head restraints/headrests” in this section.
use of a top tether strap in seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 6.

LRS0671 WRS0697
Forward-facing – step 4 Forward-facing – step 6
4. For child restraints that are equipped with 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
additional slack from the anchor attach- to side while holding the child restraint near
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
in the center of the child restraint with your straint should not move more than 1 inch
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
and seatback while tightening the webbing forward and check to see if the LATCH at-
of the anchor attachments. tachment holds the restraint in place. If the
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
slack. in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37


2nd row bench seat 2. Open the top tether anchor 䊊
2 cover lo-
cated on the ceiling.
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
3. Secure the tether strap 䊊 1 to the tether
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and
anchor point 䊊 2 on the ceiling behind the
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
child restraint.
the head restraint/headrest when the child
restraint is removed. For additional informa- 4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
tion about head restraint/headrest adjust- manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
ment, removal and installation, refer to slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section. does not contact the top tether strap.
2. Position the top tether strap 䊊
1 over the If you have any questions when installing a
seatback. top tether strap, consult a NISSAN dealer
for details.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
LRS2714 point 䊊2 on the bottom of the seatback
behind the child restraint. WARNING
2nd row bench seat

1 Top tether strap 4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by

2 Anchor point manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to at-
Installing top tether strap CENTER SEATING POSITION tach adult seat belts, or other items or
The child restraint top tether strap must be used equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH damage the child restraint anchorages.
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
lower anchor attachments. The child restraint will not be properly
the head restraint/headrest when the child
installed using the damaged anchorage,
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH restraint is removed. For additional informa-
and a child could be seriously injured or
lower anchors (2nd row bench outboarding seat- tion about head restraint/headrest adjust-
killed in a collision.
ing positions only). ment, removal and installation, refer to
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


FORWARD-FACING CHILD Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
THE SEAT BELTS
1. If you must install a child restraint in
WARNING the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
The three-point seat belt with Automatic the seat to the rearmost position. Child
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used restraints for infants must be used in
when installing a child restraint. Failure to the rear-facing direction and, there-
use the ALR mode will result in the child fore, must not be used in the front seat.
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
collision. Also, it can change the operation er’s instructions.
of the front passenger air bag. For addi- WRS0699
The back of the child restraint should be
tional information, refer to “Front passen- Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – secured against the vehicle seatback.
ger air bag and status light” in this section. step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is
restraint” sections of this manual before installing
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
a child restraint. to reinstall the head restraint/headrest
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined when the child restraint is removed. For
weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds additional information about head
65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and
child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs installation, refer to “Head
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the restraints/headrests” in this section.
lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be
sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39


If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.

WRS0680 LRS2394
Forward-facing – step 3 Forward-facing – step 4
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is
structions for belt routing. fully retracted.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (2nd row installation only). For addi-
tional information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section.
Do not install child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0668 WRS0681 WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 5 Forward-facing – step 6 Forward-facing – step 8
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat 8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. belt; press downward and rearward firmly in fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
the center of the child restraint with your to side while holding the child restraint near
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion the seat belt path. The child restraint should
and seatback while pulling up on the seat not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
belt. side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
slack. belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41


9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.

LRS0865 LRS2714
Forward-facing – step 10 2nd row bench seat
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front 䊊
1 Top tether strap
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag 䊊
2 Anchor point
status light should illuminate. If this Installing top tether strap
light is not illuminated, refer to “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light” in this sec- The child restraint top tether strap must be used
tion. Move the child restraint to another when installing the child restraint with seat belts.
seating position. Have the system First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode) is canceled.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


2nd row bench seat 3. Secure the tether strap 䊊 1 to the tether BOOSTER SEATS
anchor point 䊊 2 on the ceiling behind the
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS child restraint. For additional information on installing a booster
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions out-
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the lined in this section.
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
the head restraint/headrest when the child slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest Precautions on booster seats
restraint is removed. For additional informa- does not contact the top tether strap.
tion about head restraint/headrest adjust- WARNING
ment, removal and installation, refer to If you have any questions when installing a
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section. top tether strap, consult a NISSAN dealer If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
for details. properly, the risk of a child being injured
2. Position the top tether strap 䊊
1 over the or killed in a sudden stop or collision
seatback. WARNING greatly increases:
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor Child restraint anchorages are designed – Make sure the shoulder portion of
point 䊊2 on the bottom of the seatback
to withstand only those loads imposed by the belt is away from the child’s face
behind the child restraint. correctly fitted child restraints. Under no and neck and the lap portion of the
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the circumstances are they to be used to at- belt does not cross the stomach.
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any tach adult seat belts, or other items or – Make sure the shoulder belt is not
slack. equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could behind the child or under the child’s
damage the child restraint anchorages. arm.
CENTER SEATING POSITION The child restraint will not be properly
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and installed using the damaged anchorage, – A booster seat must only be installed
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall and a child could be seriously injured or in a seating position that has a
the head restraint/headrest when the child killed in a collision. lap/shoulder belt.
restraint is removed. For additional informa-
tion about head restraint/headrest adjust-
ment, removal and installation, refer to
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.
2. Open the top tether anchor 䊊
2 cover lo-
cated on the ceiling.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464

A. Low back booster seat Booster seats of various sizes are offered by ● Make sure the child’s head will be properly
several manufacturers. When selecting any supported by the booster seat or vehicle
B. High back booster seat
booster seat, keep the following points in mind: seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
● Choose only a booster seat with a label
low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
seatback must be at or above the center of
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
the center of the child’s ears, a high back
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be booster seat should be used.
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat ● If the booster seat is compatible with your
and seat belt system. vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Lock- WRS0699 LRS0454
ing Retractor (ALR) mode when using a Front passenger position
booster seat with the seat belts. 1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rear- 3. The booster seat should be positioned on
For additional information, refer to all Warnings most position. the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
and Cautions in the “Child safety,” “Child re-
straints” and “Booster seats” sections of this 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only If necessary, adjust or remove the head
manual before installing a child restraint. place it in a front-facing direction. Always restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- booster seat fit. If the head
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the structions. restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a
2nd or 3rd rows or in the front passenger seat: secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the
booster seat is removed. For additional
information about head restraint/headrest
adjustment, removal and installation, refer to
“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45


SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)

If the seating position does not have an PRECAUTIONS ON SRS


adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is This SRS section contains important information
interfering with the proper booster seat fit, concerning the following systems:
try another seating position or a different
booster seat. ● Driver and front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low Bag System)
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- ● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing. mental air bag
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt ● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
toward the retractor to take up extra slack. over supplemental air bag
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned ● Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat LRS0865 Supplemental front-impact air bag system
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
seat belt routing. passenger seat, place the ignition switch in cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc- the ON position. The front passenger air bag the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
tions for properly fastening a seat belt status light may or may not illuminate, collisions.
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with depending on the size of the child and the Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
retractor” in this section. type of booster seat being used. For addi- mental air bag system
tional information, refer to “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section. This system can help cushion the impact force to
the chest area of the driver and front passenger in
certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags
are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the head of occupants in the outboard seating
positions in certain side-impact or rollover colli-
sions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle
is impacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags on both
sides are designed to inflate and remain inflated
for a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash
protection provided by the driver and front pas-
senger seat belts and is not a substitute for
them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn WRS0031
and the occupant seated a suitable distance
away from the steering wheel, instrument panel WARNING ● The seat belts and the front air bags are
and door finishers. For additional information, most effective when you are sitting well
● The front air bags ordinarily will not back and upright in the seat. The front air
instructions, and precautions on seat belt usage, inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
refer to “Seat belts” in this section. bags inflate with great force. Even with
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron- the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if
The supplemental air bags operate only tal collision. Always wear your seat you are unrestrained, leaning forward,
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON belts to help reduce the risk or severity sitting sideways or out of position in any
position. of injury in various kinds of accidents. way, you are at greater risk of injury or
After placing the ignition switch in the ON ● The front passenger air bag will not death in a crash. You may also receive
position, the supplemental air bag warning inflate if the passenger air bag status serious or fatal injuries from the front air
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag light is lit or if the front passenger seat bag if you are up against it when it in-
warning light will turn off after about 7 sec- is unoccupied. For additional informa- flates. Always sit back against the seat-
onds if the system is operational. tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag back and as far away as practical from
and status light” in this section. the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47


● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors the severity of a collision and
seat belt usage then inflates the air
bags as needed. Failure to properly
wear seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-
senger air bag OFF under some condi-
tions. This sensor is only used in this ARS1133
seat. Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
ing wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043

WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49


ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046

WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating front air bag could seriously in-
jure or kill your child. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints”
in this section.

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


WRS0431 SSS0162 SSS0159

WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact and rollover supplemental air
bags:
● The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower
severity side collision. Always wear
your seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51


WARNING
● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat with both feet on the floor. The
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples WRS0032
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations. WARNING
● When sitting in the 2nd row, do not hold
onto the seatback of the front seat. If
the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
3. Occupant classification sensor (weight sen-
sor)
4. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag modules
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
over supplemental air bags
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
over supplemental air bag inflators
7. Satellite sensors
8. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
9. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
10. Crash zone sensor

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passen-
ger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,
please observe the following items.
● Do not allow a passenger in the 2nd row
LRS2715 to push or pull on the seatback pocket.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53


● Do not place heavy loads heavier than ● Confirm the operating condition with Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
2.2 lb (1 kg) on the seatback, head the front passenger air bag status light. indication of proper front air bag system opera-
restraint/headrest or in the seatback tion.
● If you notice that the front passenger air
pocket. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors
bag status light is not operating as de-
● Do not store luggage behind the seat scribed in this section, please take your information from the crash zone sensor and the
that can press into the seatback. vehicle to a NISSAN dealer to check the Air bag Control Unit (ACU). Inflator operation is
occupant classification system. based on the severity of a collision and seat belt
● Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the 2nd row. If the ● Until you have confirmed with your usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the
front seat does contact the 2nd row, the dealer that your passenger seat occu- occupant classification sensor is also monitored.
air bag system may determine a sensor pant classification system is working Based on information from the sensor, only one
malfunction has occurred and the front properly, position the occupants in the front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on
passenger air bag status light may illu- rear seating positions. the crash severity. Additionally, the front passen-
minate and the supplemental air bag ger air bag may be automatically turned OFF
warning light may flash. This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad- under some conditions, depending on the weight
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front detected on the passenger seat and how the seat
● If a forward-facing child restraint is in- passenger seats. This system is designed to belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
stalled in the front passenger seat, do meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-
not position the front passenger seat so the passenger air bag status light will be illumi-
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of the nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not
the child restraint contacts the instru-
information, cautions and warnings in this be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). For
ment panel. If the child restraint does
contact the instrument panel, the sys- manual must be followed. additional information, refer to “Front passenger
tem may determine the seat is occupied The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is air bag and status light” in this section. One front
and the passenger air bag may deploy located in the center of the steering wheel. The air bag inflating does not indicate improper per-
in a collision. Also the front passenger passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is formance of the system.
air bag status light may not illuminate. mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. If you have any questions about your air bag
For additional information, refer to The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher system, please contact NISSAN or a NISSAN
“Child restraints” in this section for in- severity frontal collisions, although they may in-
formation about installing and using dealer. If you are considering modification of your
flate if the forces in another type of collision are vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
child restraints.
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. front of this Owner’s Manual.
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise After placing the ignition switch in the ON
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. position, the supplemental air bag warning
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history onds if the system is operational.
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body. LRS0865

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat Front passenger air bag and status light
belts should be correctly worn and the driver and
passenger seated upright as far as practical WARNING
away from the steering wheel or instrument The front passenger air bag is designed to
panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to automatically turn OFF under some condi-
help protect the front occupants. Because of this, tions. Read this section carefully to learn
the force of the front air bag inflating can increase how it operates. Proper use of the seat,
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or seat belt and child restraints is necessary
is against, the front air bag module during infla- for most effective protection. Failure to
tion. follow all instructions in this manual con-
cerning the use of seats, seat belts and
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision. child restraints can increase the risk or
The front air bags operate only when the severity of injury in an accident.
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55


Status light In addition to the above, certain objects placed signed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in
The front passenger seat is equipped with an on the front passenger seat may also cause the accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) light to operate as described above depending restraint of the type specified in the regulations is
that turns the front passenger air bag on or off on their weight. on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can
depending on the weight applied to the front be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
passenger seat. The status of the front passen- For additional information related to the normal
ger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front operation and troubleshooting of this occupant Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
passenger air bag status light which is classification sensor system, please refer to properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
located on the instrument panel. “Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this lined in this manual should not cause the front
section. passenger air bag to be automatically turned
After the ignition switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙
OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,
position, the front passenger air bag status light Front passenger air bag however if the occupant takes his/her weight off
on the instrument panel illuminates for about
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto- the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting up-
7 seconds and then turns off or remains illumi-
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
nated depending on the front passenger seat
under some conditions as described below in otherwise being out of position), this could cause
occupied status. The light operates as follows:
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be
● Unoccupied front passenger’s seat: passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt
The light is OFF and the front passen- properly for the most effective protection by the
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
ger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a seat belt and supplemental air bag.
vehicle are not part of this system.
crash. NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
● Front passenger seat occupied by a small the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
adult, child or child restraint as outlined in NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
this section: The light illuminates to restraints and booster seats be properly installed
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
indicate that the front passenger air bag is in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to
OFF and will not inflate in a crash. classification sensor is designed to operate as
meet the requirements.
described above to turn the front passenger air
● Occupied front passenger seat and the pas- The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle bag OFF for specified child restraints as required
senger meets the conditions as outlined in is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an by the regulations. Failing to properly secure
this section: The light is OFF to indi- occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For child restraints and to use the ALR mode may
cate that the front passenger air bag is op- example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or
erational. the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is de- sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
OFF. For additional information about proper use (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in this crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat light , located in the meter and gauges area
section. belt is not being used properly. Make sure that of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the sys-
the child restraint is installed properly, the seat tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
belt is used properly and the occupant is posi- Normal operation
front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate
tioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not
in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the In order for the occupant classification sensor
illuminated, reposition the occupant or child re- system to classify the front passenger based on
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object’s weight detected by the occupant straint in a rear seat. weight, please follow the precautions and steps
classification sensor. Other conditions could also If the front passenger air bag status light will not outlined below:
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is illuminate even though you believe that the child Precautions
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. properly positioned, the system may be sensing ● Make sure that there are no objects weigh-
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is ing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or
are seated and restrained properly. OFF). A NISSAN dealer can check that the sys- placed in the seatback pocket.
Using the front passenger air bag status light, you tem is OFF by using a special tool. However, until ● Make sure that a child restraint or other
can monitor when the front passenger air bag is you have confirmed with your dealer that your air object is not pressing against the rear of the
automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied. bag is working properly, reposition the occupant seatback.
The light will not illuminate when the front pas- or child restraint in a rear seat. ● Make sure that a rear passenger is not push-
senger seat is unoccupied.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front ing or pulling on the back of the front pas-
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front passenger air bag status light will take a few senger seat.
passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indi- seconds to register a change in the front passen- ● Make sure that the front passenger seat or
cating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the ger seat status. For example, if a large adult who seatback is not forced back against an ob-
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the ject on the seat or floor behind it.
properly or not using the seat belt properly. vehicle, the front passenger air bag status light
will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and ● Make sure that there is no object placed
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
under the front passenger seat.
the front passenger air bag status light may or then to OFF. This is normal system operation and
may not be illuminated, depending on the size of does not indicate a malfunction.
the child and the type of child restraint being
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
Steps Troubleshooting NOTE:
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats” If you think the front passenger air bag status light A system check will be performed during
section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning is incorrect: which the front passenger air bag status
against the seatback, and centered on the light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
seat cushion with your feet comfortably ex- 1. If the light is ON with no front passenger and
initially.
tended to the floor. no objects on the front passenger seat:
If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle should
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap. This may be due to the following conditions that
be checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
may be interfering with the weight sensors:
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat possible.
belts” section of this manual. ● An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-
2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the
ing on the seat or placed in the seatback
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds al- front passenger seat:
pocket.
lowing the system to classify the front pas-
● Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light
senger before the vehicle is put into motion. ● A child restraint or other object pressing
is functioning as intended. The front passen-
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the against the rear of the seatback.
ger air bag is suppressed.
front passenger air bag status light. ● A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then
back of the front passenger seat.
NOTE: this may be due to the following conditions that
● Forcing the front seat or seatback against an may be interfering with the weight sensors:
This vehicle’s occupant classification sen- object on the seat or floor behind it.
sor system locks the classification during ● Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
driving so it is important that you confirm ● An object placed under the front passenger against the seatback, and centered on the
that the front passenger is properly classi- seat. seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably
fied prior to driving. Also, the occupant extended to the floor.
classification sensor system may recalcu- ● An object placed between the seat cushion
and center console or between the seat ● A child restraint or other object pressing
late the weight of the occupant when the against the rear of the seatback.
vehicle comes to a stop (i.e. stop light, stop cushion and the door.
sign, etc.), so front passenger seat occu- ● A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop
pants should continue to remain seated as back of the front passenger seat.
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of
outlined above. the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and ● Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
wait 1 minute. object on the seat or floor behind it.
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
● An object placed under the front passenger ● The child restraint is not properly installed, NOTE:
seat. as outlined in the “Child restraints” section of
A system check will be performed during
this manual.
● An object placed between the seat cushion which the front passenger air bag status
and center console or between the seat ● An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang- light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
cushion and the door. ing on the seat or placed in the seatback initially.
pocket.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,
when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of ● A child restraint or other object pressing child or child restraint should be repositioned in
the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and against the rear of the seatback. the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked
wait 1 minute. by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
● A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the
NOTE: back of the front passenger seat. Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
A system check will be performed during ● Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
which the front passenger air bag status light object on the seat or floor behind it.
WARNING
will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially. ● An object placed under the front passenger ● Do not place any objects on the steering
If the light is still ON after this, the person should seat. wheel pad or on the instrument panel.
be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat ● An object placed between the seat cushion Also, do not place any objects between
and the vehicle should be checked by a NISSAN and center console. any occupant and the steering wheel or
dealer as soon as possible. instrument panel. Such objects may be-
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop come dangerous projectiles and cause
3. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of injury if the front air bags inflate.
child restraint occupying the front passen- the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and
ger seat. ● Immediately after inflation, several
wait 1 minute.
front air bag system components will be
This may be due to the following conditions that hot. Do not touch them; you may se-
may be interfering with the weight sensors: verely burn yourself.
● Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with his/her feet com-
fortably extended to the floor.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
● No unauthorized changes should be ● Modifying or tampering with the front ● Work on and around the front air bag
made to any components or wiring of passenger seat may result in serious system should be done by a NISSAN
the supplemental air bag system. This is personal injury. For example, do not dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
to prevent accidental inflation of the change the front seats by placing mate- ment should also be done by a NISSAN
supplemental air bag or damage to the rial on the seat cushion or by installing dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
supplemental air bag system. additional trim material, such as seat System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should
covers, on the seat that are not specifi- not be modified or disconnected. Unau-
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
cally designed to assure proper air bag thorized electrical test equipment and
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
operation. Additionally, do not stow any probing devices should not be used on
pension system or front end structure.
objects under the front passenger seat the air bag system.
This could affect proper operation of
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
the front air bag system. ● A cracked windshield should be re-
objects may interfere with the proper
placed immediately by a qualified repair
● Tampering with the front air bag system operation of the occupant classification
facility. A cracked windshield could af-
may result in serious personal injury. sensor (weight sensor).
fect the function of the supplemental air
Tampering includes changes to the
● No unauthorized changes should be bag system.
steering wheel and the instrument
made to any components or wiring of
panel assembly by placing material *The SRS wiring harness connectors are
the seat belt system. This may affect the
over the steering wheel pad and above yellow and orange for easy identification.
front air bag system. Tampering with
the instrument panel or by installing
the seat belt system may result in seri- When selling your vehicle, we request that you
additional trim material around the air
ous personal injury. inform the buyer about the front air bag system
bag system.
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
● Removing or modifying the front pas- in this Owner’s Manual.
senger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


flate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
They may not inflate in certain side collisions. driver and front passenger seated upright as far
as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in
passengers should be seated as far away as
certain types of rollover collisions or near roll-
practical from the door finishers and side roof
overs. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate
example, during severe off-roading) may cause
quickly in order to help protect the occupants.
the curtain air bags to inflate.
Because of this, the force of the side air bags and
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,
bag operation. these air bag modules during inflation. The side
air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
over.
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
WRS0381 by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short
Front seat-mounted side-impact and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken time.
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
supplemental air bag and roof- choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-
The side air bags and curtain air bags op-
mounted curtain side-impact and erate only when the ignition switch is
dition should get fresh air promptly.
placed in the ON position.
rollover supplemental air bag systems Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
The side air bags are located in the outside of the help to cushion the impact force on the chest of
position, the supplemental air bag warning
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
are located in the side roof rails in all three rows. cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-
All of the information, cautions and warn- pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-
onds if the system is operational.
ings in this manual apply and must be fol- sitions in all rows. They can help save lives and
lowed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating
designed to inflate in higher severity side colli- side air bag or curtain air bag may cause abra-
sions, although they may inflate if the forces in sions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain
another type of collision are similar to those of a air bags do not provide restraint to the lower
higher severity impact. They are designed to in- body.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
WARNING ● Tampering with the side air bag system Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
● Do not place any objects near the seat-
may result in serious personal injury. seats)
For example, do not change the front
back of the front seats. Also, do not
seats by placing material near the seat- WARNING
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
backs or by installing additional trim
etc.) between the front door finisher
material, such as seat covers, around ● The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
and the front seat. Such objects may after activation. They must be replaced
the side air bag.
become dangerous projectiles and together with the retractor and buckle
cause injury if a side air bag inflates. ● Work around and on the side air bag as a unit.
and curtain air bag systems should be
● Right after inflation, several side air bag ● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation
and curtain air bag system components collision but pretensioner(s) are not ac-
of electrical equipment should also be
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may tivated, be sure to have the preten-
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-
severely burn yourself. sioner system checked and, if neces-
ing harnesses* should not be modified
● No unauthorized changes should be or disconnected. Unauthorized electri- sary, replaced by a NISSAN dealer.
made to any components or wiring of cal test equipment and probing devices ● No unauthorized changes should be
the side air bag and curtain air bag should not be used on the side air bag made to any components or wiring of
systems. This is to prevent damage to or or curtain air bag systems. the pretensioner system. This is to pre-
accidental inflation of the side air bag vent damage to or accidental activation
and curtain air bag systems. *The SRS wiring harness or connectors are of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with
yellow or orange for easy identification. the pretensioner system may result in
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- When selling your vehicle, we request that you serious personal injury.
pension system or side panel. This inform the buyer about the side air bags and ● Work around and on the pretensioner
could affect proper operation of the cur- curtain air bag system and guide the buyer to the system should be done by a NISSAN
tain air bag systems. appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


● If you need to dispose of the preten- The supplemental air bag warning light is
sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, contact a used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner
NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal pro- system. For additional information, refer to
cedures could cause personal injury. ⬙Supplemental air bag warning light⬙ in this sec-
tion. If the operation of the supplemental air bag
The pretensioner system may activate with the warning light indicates there is a malfunction,
supplemental air bag system in certain types of have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, When selling your vehicle, we request that you
the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
when the vehicle becomes involved in certain and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat in this Owner’s Manual.
occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat
belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed
to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are WRS0885
used the same way as conventional seat belts. 1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re- The warning labels are located on the sur-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This face of the sun visor.
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history WARNING LABELS
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly. Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters shown in the illustration.
allow the seat belt to release webbing (if neces-
sary) to reduce forces against the chest.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63


If any of the following conditions occur, the front
WARNING
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on sioner systems need servicing:
a seat protected by an air bag in front of it.
If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious ● The supplemental air bag warning light re-
injury or death. mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may
not operate properly. They must be checked and
LRS0100 repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT WARNING
The supplemental air bag warning light, If the supplemental air bag warning light
displaying in the instrument panel, moni- is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten- side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-
sioner(s) and all related wiring. sioner systems will not operate in an acci-
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or
position, the supplemental air bag warning light others, have your vehicle checked by a
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
off. This means the system is operational.

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Repair and replacement procedure ● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected by a
and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
the front end or side portion of the
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light vehicle.
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.
Repair and replacement of these supplemental ● If you need to dispose of the supple-
air bag systems should be done only by a mental air bag or pretensioner systems
NISSAN dealer. or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
When maintenance work is required on the ve- could cause personal injury.
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
● If there is an impact to your vehicle from
bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be
any direction, your Occupant Classifica-
pointed out to the person performing the mainte- tion Sensor (OCS) should be checked
nance. The ignition switch should always be by a NISSAN dealer to verify it is still
placed in the LOCK position when working under functioning correctly. The OCS should
the hood or inside the vehicle. be checked even if no air bags deploy as
a result of the impact. Failure to verify
WARNING proper OCS function may result in an
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or improper air bag deployment resulting
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag in injury or death.
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, the acti-
vated pretensioner(s) must also be re-
placed. The air bag module and preten-
sioner(s) should be replaced by a
NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and
pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32


Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Rear switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
Compass (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Daytime running light system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . 2-19 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 All-wheel drive (AWD) lock switch (if so equipped) . . . 2-43
Main Menu Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 SPORT mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Resetting the trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Warning systems switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Vehicle information display warnings and E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 12v outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Cargo cover (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Power panoramic moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Console light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Cargo area storage bin (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Personal Lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Divide-n-hide® adjustable floor
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
INSTRUMENT PANEL

6. Vent (P. 4-31)


7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
8. Radio (P. 4-42)
Navigation system*(if so equipped)
(P. 4-4)
9. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 2-32)
10. Glove box (P. 2-48)
11. Heater and air conditioning controls
(P. 4-32)
12. Power outlet (P. 2-46)
13. Shift lever (P. 5-19)
14. Auxiliary jack (P. 4-61)
USB port (P. 4-61)
15. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 2-32)
16. Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-32)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(P. 4-42)
LIC2626 17. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-46)
Horn (P. 2-41)
1. Vent (P. 4-31) 4. Wiper and washer switch, rear wiper
18. Control panel and vehicle information
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn washer switch (P. 2-34)
display switches (P. 2-19)
signal switch (P. 2-37) 5. Ignition switch (if so equipped)
19. Hood release (P. 3-23)
3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) (P. 5-11)
Fuel door release (P. 3-31)
Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-10) Push-button ignition switch (if so
Vehicle information display (P. 2-19) equipped) (P. 5-13)
2-2 Instruments and controls
METERS AND GAUGES

20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF


switch (P. 2-43)
SPORT mode switch (P. 5-22)
ECO mode switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-22)
Warning system switch (if so
equipped) (P. 2-45)
Power liftgate switch (if so equipped)
(P. 3-24)
Power liftgate main switch (if so
equipped) (P. 3-24)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-43)
Hill descent control switch (if so
equipped) (P. 2-44)
21. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-37)
Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-3)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in pa-
rentheses for operating details. LIC2627
1. Tachometer
2. Warning and indicator lights
3. Vehicle information display
4. Speedometer
5. Fuel gauge
6. Engine coolant temperature gauge
Instruments and controls 2-3
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Changing the display
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and Push the TRIP RESET 䊊 3 switch on the instru-
odometer. The speedometer is located on the ment panel to change the display as follows:
right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is
located within the vehicle information display. Trip → Trip → Trip

Speedometer Resetting the trip odometer


Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊 3 for 1 second
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. resets the currently displayed trip odometer to
zero.

LIC3350
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer 䊊 1 and the twin trip odometer 䊊 2
are displayed below the vehicle information dis-
play when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
The odometer records the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.

2-4 Instruments and controls


CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the vehicle
may seriously damage the engine. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “If your ve-
hicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual for
immediate action required.
LIC2219 LIC2220
TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- GAUGE
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
the red zone 䊊1 .
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range 䊊 1 when the gauge needle points
CAUTION within the zone shown in the illustration.
When engine speed approaches the red
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the
engine in the red zone may cause serious outside air temperature and driving conditions.
engine damage.

Instruments and controls 2-5


COMPASS (if so equipped)

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. dicates the heading direction of the vehicle.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
CAUTION the button as described in the charts be-
low to activate various features of the automatic
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the anti-glare rearview mirror.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible. Push and hold Feature:
After a few driving trips. the light the (Push button again for about 1 sec-
should turn off. If the light remains on button for about: ond to change settings)
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle 1 second Compass display toggles on/off
inspected by a NISSAN dealer. Compass zone can be changed to
8 seconds
correct false compass readings
● For additional information, refer to
10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
LIC2222 this section. For additional information about the automatic
FUEL GAUGE anti-glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare
rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level adjustments” section of this manual.
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The low fuel warning message appears in the
vehicle information display when the amount of
fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters 0 (Empty).

2-6 Instruments and controls


You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-
pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.

LIC1487

COMPASS DISPLAY
Press the button for about one second
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position to toggle the compass direction display
䊊1 on or off. The display will indicate the direction
that the vehicle is heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Instruments and controls 2-7


Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geo-
graphical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Press and hold the button for about
8 seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.
3. Press the button repeatedly to toggle
through the zone numbers until the desired
number appears in the display. Once you
have selected a zone number, the display
will show a compass direction within a few
seconds.
Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the for about 10 seconds. The “C”
icon in the compass display will illuminate.

WIC0355

2-8 Instruments and controls


2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.

CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the op-
eration of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.

Instruments and controls 2-9


WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
warning light

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Overdrive OFF indicator light
(if so equipped)

or Brake warning light All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light Security indicator light
(if so equipped)

Charge warning light ECO mode indicator light (if so equipped) Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) system Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light
warning light (if so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light SPORT mode indicator light

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light High beam indicator light (blue) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
(if so equipped)

Master warning light Hill descent control system ON indicator Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator
light (if so equipped) light

Power steering warning light

2-10 Instruments and controls


CHECKING LIGHTS or Anti-lock Braking tion, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, System (ABS)
fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch
warning light or Brake warning light
in the ON position without starting the engine.
The following lights (if so equipped) will come on: When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
This light functions for both the parking brake and
position, the ABS warning light illuminates and the foot brake systems.
, or , then turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera-
tional. Low brake fluid warning light
The following lights (if so equipped) come on
briefly and then go off: If the ABS warning light illuminates while the When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
engine is running or while driving, it may indicate position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
or , , , the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the If the light comes on while the engine is running
system checked by a NISSAN dealer. with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-
, , , , hicle and perform the following:
If any light fails to come on or operate in a way If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
other than described, it may indicate a burned- tion is turned off. The brake system then operates
as necessary. For additional information, re-
out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the normally but without anti-lock assistance. For
fer to “Brake fluid” in the “Maintenance and
system checked by a NISSAN dealer. additional information, refer to “Brake system” in do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
on the vehicle information display between the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) warning system checked by a NISSAN
speedometer and tachometer. For additional in- warning light (if so equipped) dealer.
formation, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
When enabled, the BSW warning light appears
this section. WARNING
in the vehicle information display.
WARNING LIGHTS ● Your brake system may not be working
The BSW system is designed to detect ap- properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor- proaching vehicles when backing out from a ing could be dangerous. If you judge it
mation display” in this section. parking space. This option (if so equipped) can to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
be enabled/disabled in the “Settings” menu un- service station for repairs. Otherwise,
der “Driver Assistance.” For additional informa- have your vehicle towed.

Instruments and controls 2-11


● Pressing the brake pedal with the en- the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
level may increase your stopping dis- dealer immediately. and turns off.
tance and braking will require greater Low tire pressure warning
pedal effort as well as pedal travel. CAUTION
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
● If the brake fluid level is below the Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing. pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
A “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning also
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a Forward Emergency Braking appears in the vehicle information display.
NISSAN dealer. (FEB) system warning light (if When the low tire pressure warning light
so equipped) illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
tire pressure of all four tires to the recom-
indicator This light illuminates when the Forward Emer- mended COLD tire pressure shown on the
When the parking brake is released and the gency Braking system is set to OFF on the meter Tire and Loading Information label located
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake display. in the driver’s door opening. The low tire
warning light and the ABS warning light illumi- If the light illuminates when the Forward Emer- pressure warning light does not automati-
nates, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning gency Braking system is ON, it may indicate that cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-
properly. Have the brake system checked and, if the system is unavailable. For additional informa- justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-
tion, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking sys- ommended pressure, the vehicle must be
necessary, repaired by a NISSAN dealer
tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of this driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to
promptly. Avoid high-speed driving and abrupt
manual. activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
braking. For additional information, refer to “Anti-
lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this Low tire pressure warning light pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
section. gauge to check the tire pressure.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning ap-
Charge warning light Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pears each time the ignition switch is placed in
pressure of all tires except the spare. the ON position as long as the low tire pressure
If this light comes on while the engine is running, warning light remains illuminated.
it may indicate the charging system is not func- The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-
functioning properly. mation display” in the “Instruments and controls”
2-12 Instruments and controls
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System ● If the light does not illuminate with the ● Since the spare tire is not equipped with
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and ignition switch placed in the ON posi- TPMS, when mounted or a wheel is re-
in the “In case of emergency” section of this tion, have the vehicle checked by a placed tire pressure will not be indi-
manual. NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. cated, the TPMS will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
TPMS malfunction ● If the light illuminates while driving,
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low light will remain on after 1 minute. Con-
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi- tact a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos-
pull off the road to a safe location and
mately one minute when the ignition switch is sible for tire replacement and/or sys-
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on tem resetting.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
after the one minute. Have the system checked permanently damage the tires and in- ● Replacing tires with those not originally
by a NISSAN dealer. The “Tire Pressure Low Add crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se- specified by NISSAN could affect the
Air” warning does not appear if the low tire pres- rious vehicle damage could occur and proper operation of the TPMS.
sure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS may lead to an accident and could result
malfunction. in serious personal injury or death. CAUTION
Check the tire pressure for all four tires.
For additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure
Adjust the tire pressure to the recom- ● TPMS is not a substitute for the regular
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and tire pressure check. Be sure to check
mended COLD tire pressure shown on
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main- the Tire and Loading Information label the tire pressure regularly.
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this located in the driver’s door opening to ● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
manual. turn the low tire pressure warning light of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
OFF. If the light still illuminates while TPMS may not operate correctly.
WARNING driving after adjusting the tire pressure,
a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be ● Be sure to install the specified size of
● Radio waves could adversely affect tires to the four wheels correctly.
electric medical equipment. Those who malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire,
use a pacemaker should contact the replace it wit ha spare tire as soon as
electric medical equipment manufac- possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are
turer for the possible influences before properly inflated, have the vehicle
use. checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Instruments and controls 2-13


Low windshield-washer fluid If the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system malfunc- ● If the warning light is still on after the
tions, or the diameter of the front and the rear
warning light (if so equipped) above operations, have your vehicle
wheels are different, the master warning light will checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
This light comes on when the windshield-washer illuminate. For additional information, refer to “All- possible.
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid Wheel Drive (AWD)” in the “Starting and driving”
as necessary. For additional information, refer to section of this manual. Power steering warning light
“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. ● If the warning light comes on while driving
there may be a malfunction in the AWD WARNING
Master warning light system. Reduce the vehicle speed and have ● If the engine is not running or is turned
your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as off while driving, the power assist for
When the ignition is in the ON position, the soon as possible. the steering will not work. Steering will
master warning light illuminates if any of the fol- be harder to operate.
lowing are displayed on the vehicle information
CAUTION ● When the power steering warning light
display.
● If the master warning light was illumi- illuminates with the engine running,
● All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Tire Size Incorrect nated while driving: there will be no power assist for the
See Owner’s Manual steering. You will still have control of
—AWD High Temp Stop vehicle the vehicle, but the steering will be
● All-Wheel Drive (AWD) High Temp. Stop
vehicle Pull off the road in a safe area and idle the much harder to operate. Have the power
engine. The driving mode will change to steering system checked by a NISSAN
● All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Error See Owner’s 2WD to prevent the AWD system from dealer.
Manual malfunctioning. If the warning light turns When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
● No key warning off, you can drive again. the power steering warning light illuminates. After
● Low fuel warning —Tire Size Incorrect See Owner’s Manual starting the engine, the power steering warning
light turns off. This indicates that the power steer-
● Low windshield-washer fluid warning Pull off the road in a safe area and idle the
ing system is operational. If the power steering
engine. Check that all tire sizes are the
● Parking brake release warning same, tire pressure is correct and tires are warning light illuminates while the engine is run-
not worn. ning, it may indicate the power steering system is
● Door/liftgate open warning not functioning properly and may need servicing.
● Loose fuel cap warning Have the power steering system checked by a
2-14 Instruments and controls
NISSAN dealer. For additional information, refer If any of the following conditions occur, the front INDICATOR LIGHTS
to “Power steering” in the “Starting and driving” air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-
section of this manual. sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-
must be taken to a NISSAN dealer: mation display” in this section.
Seat belt warning light and
● The supplemental air bag warning light re- All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK
chime mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
indicator light (if so equipped)
The light and chime remind you to fasten your ● The supplemental air bag warning light
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
flashes intermittently. the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s ● The supplemental air bag warning light does illuminates and then turns off.
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime not come on at all.
When selecting AWD LOCK mode while the
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental engine is running, the AWD LOCK indicator light
seat belt is securely fastened. restraint system (air bag system) and/or the seat illuminates.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if belts with pretensioner system may not function
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened properly. For additional information, refer to CAUTION
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For “Supplemental restraint system (SRS)” in the
“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK mode.
the ON position, the system does not activate the straint system” section of this manual.
warning light for the front passenger. ECO mode indicator light (if so
WARNING
For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in equipped)
the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag, This light comes on when the ECO mode has
restraint system” section of this manual. been selected. For additional information, refer to
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-
Supplemental air bag warning sioner systems will not operate in an acci- “ECO mode switch” in the “Starting and driving”
dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or section of this manual.
light
others, have your vehicle checked by a
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
Instruments and controls 2-15
Front fog light indicator light (if Hill descent control system Malfunction Indicator Light
so equipped) ON indicator light (if so (MIL)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when equipped) If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
the front fog lights are ON. For additional infor- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON while the engine is running, it may indicate a
mation, refer to “Fog light switch” in this section. position, this light comes on briefly and then turns potential emission control malfunction.
off. The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler
Front passenger air bag status
The light comes on when the hill descent control cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out
light system is activated. of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle
and the passenger front air bag will be OFF If the hill descent control switch is on and the has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the
depending on how the front passenger seat is indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged. fuel tank.
being used. If the indicator light does not come on when the After a few driving trips, the light should
hill descent switch is on, the system may not be turn off if no other potential emission control
For additional information, refer to “Front passen-
functioning properly. Have the system checked system malfunction exists.
ger air bag and status light” in the “Safety — by a NISSAN dealer.
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec-
tem” section of this manual. For additional information, refer to “Hill descent onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the
control system on indicator light” in this section engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle
High beam indicator light and “Hill descent control system” in the “Starting is not ready for an emission control system
and driving” section of this manual. inspection/maintenance test. For additional infor-
(blue) mation, refer to “Readiness for
This blue light comes on when the headlight high inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Tech-
beams are on and goes out when the low beams nical and consumer information” section of this
are selected. manual.
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.

2-16 Instruments and controls


Operation The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady. For additional information, refer to “Security sys-
Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. tems” in this section.
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the
● MIL on steady — An emission control system dealer. Side light and headlight
malfunction has been detected. Check the indicator light (green)
fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel Cap warning CAUTION The side light and headlight indicator light illumi-
appears in the vehicle information display. If Continued vehicle operation without hav- nates when the side light or headlight position is
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten ing the emission control system checked selected. For additional information, refer to
or install the cap and continue to drive the and repaired as necessary could lead to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.
vehicle. The light should turn off after poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
a few driving trips. If the light does not and possible damage to the emission con- Slip indicator light
turn off after a few driving trips, have the trol system.
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You This indicator will blink when the VDC system is
do not need to have your vehicle towed to Overdrive OFF indicator light operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that
the dealer. the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is
The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when nearing its traction limits.
● MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been the overdrive off mode is selected.
detected which may damage the emission You may feel or hear the system working; this is
control system. To reduce or avoid emission For additional information, refer to “Continuously normal.
control system damage: Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting and
The light will blink for a few seconds after the
driving” section of this manual.
– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.
(72 km/h). Security indicator light indicator light also comes on when
The
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. you place the ignition switch in the ON position.
This light blinks when the ignition switch is The light will turn off after approximately 2 sec-
– avoid steep uphill grades. placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC (if so onds if the system is operational. If the light does
equipped) position. not come on have the system checked by a
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed. The blinking security indicator light indicates that NISSAN dealer.
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are
operational.
Instruments and controls 2-17
SPORT mode indicator light The VDC light also comes on when you place the Light reminder chime
ignition switch in the ON position. The light will
turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-
This light illuminates and then turns off when the tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
ignition switch is placed into the ON position, and operational. If the light stays on or comes on
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
when the overdrive off mode off is selected. along with the indicator light while you are
driving, have the VDC system checked by a Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
For additional information, refer to “Continuously ing the vehicle.
Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting and NISSAN dealer.
driving” section of this manual. While the VDC system is operating, you might NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer
feel slight vibration or hear the system working
Turn signal/hazard indicator when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the
lights is normal. Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when
locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal AUDIBLE REMINDERS sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent
switch is activated. Key. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned Brake pad wear warning Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and
on. The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. adjustments” section of this manual.

Vehicle Dynamic Control When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it


makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
(VDC) OFF indicator light vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
This indicator light comes on when the VDC off pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates the VDC soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
system is not operating.
Key left reminder chime
Push the VDC off switch again or restart the
engine and the system will operate normally. For A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv- OFF position with the Intelligent Key left in the
ing” section of this manual. vehicle. Make sure the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position, and take the Intelligent Key
with you when leaving the vehicle.

2-18 Instruments and controls


VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY


3 — go back to the previous menu
The ENTER and buttons also control audio
and control panel functions. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Steering wheel switch for audio con-
trol” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems” section of this manual.
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle is placed in the ON or ACC (if
so equipped) position, the vehicle information
display may display the following screens:
● Home
● Range
LIC2630 LIC2671
The vehicle information display is located to the ● Average speed
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:
INFORMATION DISPLAY ● Trip
● Vehicle settings ● Fuel Economy
The vehicle information display can be changed
● Trip computer information using the buttons and ENTER located on ● Compass
● Drive system warnings and settings the steering wheel. ● Audio
● Cruise control system information 䊊
1 — navigate through the items in ve- ● Driving Aids
hicle information
● NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation informa- ● Tire Pressure
tion ENTER — change or select an item in the
vehicle information display ● 4x4–i
● Chassis Control
● Indicators and warnings

2 — select/enter the Vehicle informa- ● Chassis Control
tion menu items or to change from one dis-
● Warnings
● Tire Pressure information play screen to the next (i.e. trip, TPMS, Fuel
economy) ● Settings
Instruments and controls 2-19
Warnings will only display if there are any pres- Distance to empty (dte – mile or km) The display is updated every 30 seconds. At
ent. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the
information display warnings and indicators” in The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you display shows “_ _”.
this section. with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be- Elapsed time and trip odometer (mile
To control which items display in the vehicle ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the or km)
information display, refer to “Settings” in this sec- fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.
tion. Elapsed time
The display is updated approximately every
MAIN MENU SELECTIONS 30 seconds. The elapsed time mode shows the time since the
last reset. Resetting is done by pressing
The main menu selections can be The dte mode includes a low range warning the button for longer than 1.5 seconds.
enabled/disabled to display in the vehicle infor- feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning is (The trip odometer is also reset at same time.)
mation display (VID) when the ignition switch is displayed on the screen.
Trip odometer
placed in the ON position.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte
The trip odometer mode shows the total distance
From the “Main Menu Selection” menu within the display will change to “_ _”.
the vehicle has been driven since the last reset.
“Settings” menu, select the settings to display in
● If the amount of fuel added is small, the Resetting is done by pressing the button
the VID by pressing the Enter button to
display just before the ignition switch is for longer than 1.5 seconds. (The elapsed time is
check/uncheck the box. Selections with the box
pushed to the OFF position may continue to also reset at same time.)
checked will appear in the VID when cycled
be displayed.
through. Current fuel consumption and average
● When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel consumption (MPG, l (liter)/
Home fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily 100km or km/l)
The home information screen displays various change the display.
Current fuel consumption
vehicle information.
Average speed (MPH or km/h) The current fuel consumption mode shows the
From the “Main Menu Selection” screen, select current fuel consumption.
The average speed mode shows the average
“Home” to display in the vehicle information dis-
vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is Average fuel consumption
play when the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion. done by pushing the button for longer than The average fuel consumption mode shows the
1.5 seconds. average fuel consumption since the last reset.
2-20 Instruments and controls
Resetting is done by pressing the button When the “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” or “Flat Control, hill start assist or hill descent control” in
for longer than 1.5 seconds. Tire - Visit Dealer” (if so equipped) warning ap- the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
The display is updated every 30 seconds. At pears, the display can be switched to the tire
RESETTING THE TRIP COMPUTER
about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the pressure mode by pushing the button.
display shows “_ _”. The tire pressure unit can be changed in the 1. Press the button until you reach the
TPMS setting under the Settings menu on the trip computer mode.
Navigation (if so equipped)
vehicle information display. For additional infor-
When the route guidance is set in the navigation 2. Press the button again for more than
mation, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
system, this item shows the navigation route in- 1.5 seconds to reset average fuel consump-
this section. tion, average speed, distance to empty, and
formation.
4x4–i journey time.
Audio
The audio mode shows the status of audio infor- The 4x4–i information display shows the distribu- SETTINGS
mation. tion of torque amongst the wheels in the various The setting mode allows you to change the infor-
drive modes. mation displayed in the vehicle information display:
Driving aids (if so equipped)
From the “Main Menu Selection” select “4x4–i to ● Driver Assistance
The driving aids mode shows the operating con-
dition for the following systems.
display in the vehicle information display when ● Clock
the ignition is placed in the ON position.
● Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ● Meter Settings
For additional information, refer to “All-wheel
● Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) ● Vehicle Settings
drive (if so equipped)” in the “Starting and driv-
For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot ing” section of this manual. ● Maintenance
Warning (BSW) system” and “Forward Emer-
gency Braking (FEB ” in the “Starting and driving” Chassis control ● Alarm
section of this manual.
When the Active Trace Control, Active Engine ● Tire Pressures
Tire pressure Brake, or the Active Ride Control is operated, it ● Unit
The tire pressure mode shows the pressure of all shows the operating condition. It also shows oper-
ating condition of hill start assist or hill descent ● Language
four tires while the vehicle is driven. The axle
between the tires will also display the recom- control. For additional information, refer to “Active ● Factory Reset
mended tire pressure. Trace Control, Active Engine Brake, Active Ride
Instruments and controls 2-21
Driver Assistance

Menu item Result


Driver Assistance Displays various Driver Assistance settings.
Driving Aids Displays available Driving Aids.
Blind Spot (BSW) Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning ON/OFF. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Emergency Brake Allows user to turn Emergency Brake ON/OFF. For additional information, refer to “Foward Emergency Braking (FEB) (if so
equipped)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays available Parking Aids.
Moving Object Allows user to turn Moving Object Detection (MOD) ON/OFF. For additional information, refer to “Around View® Monitor” in the
“Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.
Chassis Control Displays available Chassis Controls.
Trace Control Allows user to turn Active Trace Control ON/OFF. For additional information, refer to “Active trace control” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Engine Brake Allows user to turn Active Engine Brake ON/OFF. For additional information, refer to “Active engine brake” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

Clock

Menu item Result


Clock “Set Clock in NAVI”. For additional information, refer to “How to use the setting button” in the “Display screen, heater, air
conditioner, audio, and phone systems” section of this manual

2-22 Instruments and controls


Meter Settings
Menu item Result
Meter Settings Displays various Meter Settings that can be adjusted
Main Menu Selection Displays the Main Menu Selections that can be displayed in the VID
Home Allows user to turn the Home display ON/OFF
Range Allows user to turn the Range display ON/OFF
Average Speed Allows user to turn the Average Speed display ON/OFF
Trip Allows user to turn the Trip display ON/OFF
Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the Fuel Economy display ON/OFF
Navigation Allows user to turn the Navigation display ON/OFF
Audio Allows user to turn the Audio display ON/OFF
Driving Aids Allows user to turn the Driving Aids display ON/OFF
Tire Pressure Allows user to turn the Tire Pressure display ON/OFF
4x4–i Allows user to turn the 4x4–i display ON/OFF
Chassis Control Allows user to turn the Chassis Control display ON/OFF
Body Color Allows user to select the color of the vehicle in the VID
ECO Mode Settings Displays various ECO mode settings that can be adjusted
ECO Indicator Allows users to turn the ECO Indicator ON/OFF
DISP Mode Displays the DISP Modes
Pedal Select to display the pedal in the VID
Inst.FE Select to display the instant fuel economy in the VID
ECO Drive Report Displays ECO Drive Report options
Display Allows user to turn the ECO Drive Report display ON/OFF
View History Allows user to view the ECO Drive Report history
Back Allows the user to return to the previous screen
Reset Allows the user to reset the ECO Drive Report history
Welcome Effect Displays Welcome Effect options
Dial Effect Allows user to turn the Dial Effect display ON/OFF
Display Effect Allows user to turn the Display Effect ON/OFF

Instruments and controls 2-23


Vehicle Settings
Menu item Result
Vehicle Settings Displays various Vehicle Settings that can be adjusted
Lighting Displays Lighting options
Welcome Light Allows user to turn the Welcome Light ON/OFF.
Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the Auto Room Lamp ON/OFF.
Light Sensitivity Displays options for Light Sensitivity
Turn on earliest Select to have the vehicle lighting turn on at the earliest time
Turn on earlier Select to have the vehicle lighting turn on at an earlier time
Turn on standard Select to have the vehicle lighting turn on at the standard time
Turn on later Select to have the vehicle lighting turn on at a later time
Light Off Delay Displays option for turning off the vehicle lighting
0 sec Select to have the vehicle lighting turn off immediately
30 sec Select to have the vehicle lighting turn off after 30 seconds
45 sec Select to have the vehicle lighting turn off after 45 seconds
60 sec Select to have the vehicle lighting turn off after 60 seconds
90 sec Select to have the vehicle lighting turn off after 90 seconds
120 sec Select to have the vehicle lighting turn off after 120 seconds
150 sec Select to have the vehicle lighting turn off after 150 seconds
180 sec Select to have the vehicle lighting turn off after 180 seconds
Turn indicator Displays Turn indicator options
3 Flash Pass Allows user to turn 3 Flash Pass ON/OFF.
Locking Displays Locking options
I-Key Door Lock Allows user to turn the I-Key Door Lock ON/OFF.
Selective Unlock Allows user to turn the Selective Unlock ON/OFF.
Answer Bk. Horn Allows user to turn the Answer Bk. Horn ON/OFF.
Wipers Displays Wipers options
Speed Dependent Allows user to turn the Speed Dependent option ON/OFF.
Reverse Link Allows user to turn the Reverse Link option ON/OFF.
Drip Wipe Allows user to turn the Drip Wipe option ON/OFF.

2-24 Instruments and controls


Maintenance

Menu item Result


Maintenance Displays various Maintenance reminders that can be adjusted
Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder to check the oil and filter
Tire Allows user to set a reminder to check the tires
Other Allows user to set a reminder to check other maintenance items

Alarm

Menu item Result


Alarm Displays various Alarm options that can be adjusted
Outside Temp. Allows user to turn the Outside Temp. alarm ON/OFF
Timer Alert Allows user to set an alarm at specific time intervals
Navigation Allows user to turn the Navigation alarm ON/OFF
Phone Allows user to turn the Phone alarm ON/OFF
Mail Allows user to turn the Mail alarm ON/OFF

Tire Pressures

Menu item Result


Tire Pressures Displays Tire Pressures options
Tire Pressure Unit Displays available units for tire pressure display
psi Select to display pressure units in psi
kPa Select to display pressure units in kPa
bar Select to display pressure units in bar
Kgf/cm2 Select to display pressure units in Kgf/cm2

Instruments and controls 2-25


Unit

Menu item Result


Unit Displays Unit options
Mileage Displays available units for Mileage display
miles, MPG Select to display mileage in miles, MPG
km, km/l Select to display mileage in km, km/l
km, 1/100km Select to display mileage in km, 1/100km
Tire Pressures Displays available units for Tire Pressures display
psi Select to display pressure units in psi
kPa Select to display pressure units in kPa
bar Select to display pressure units in bar
Kgf/cm2 Select to display pressure units in Kgf/cm2
Temperature Displays available units for Temperature display
°C Select to display temperature in Celsius
°F Select to display temperature in Fahrenheit

2-26 Instruments and controls


Language

Menu item Result


Language Displays Language options
US English Select to display menus is US English
Français Select to display menus in French
Español Select to display menus in Spanish

Factory Reset

Menu Item Result


Factory Reset Displays Factory Reset options
Yes Allows user to confirm a factory reset
No Allows user to deny a factory reset

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY


WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

Instruments and controls 2-27


LIC3412

2-28 Instruments and controls


1. Engine start operation 18. All Wheel Drive (AWD) Tire Size Incorrect: No Key Detected (if so equipped)
See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)
2. No Key Detected (if so equipped) This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is
19. Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in
3. Shift to Park
the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is
20. Extended Storage Fuse
4. Key Battery Low (if so equipped) inside the vehicle.
21. Power will turn off to save the battery
5. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key sys- For additional information about the Intelligent
tem (if I-Key battery level is low) (if so 22. Power turned off to save the battery Key, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the
equipped) “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of
23. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights
this manual.
6. Key ID Incorrect (if so equipped)
24. Timer Alert — Time for a break?
Shift to Park
7. Release Parking Brake
25. Low Outside Temperature
This warning illuminates when the ignition switch
8. Low Fuel
26. Chassis Control System Error: See Owner’s is in the ACC (if so equipped) or OFF position
9. Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped) Manual and the shift lever is in any position other than P
(Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the
10. Door/liftgate Open 27. Cruise Indicator
ignition switch is in the OFF position.
11. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if 28. Transmission Shift Position Indicator
If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to
so equipped)
29. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual the P (Park) position or start the engine.
12. Loose Fuel Cap
30. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual Key Battery Low (if so equipped)
13. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key
Engine start operation
14. Flat Tire — Visit Dealer (if so equipped) battery is running out of power.
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in
15. Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery
the P (Park) position.
with a new one. For additional information, refer
16. All Wheel Drive (AWD) Error: See Owner’s
This indicator means that the engine will start by to “Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance and
Manual (if so equipped)
pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
17. All Wheel Drive (AWD) High Temp. Stop depressed. You can start the engine from any
Vehicle (if so equipped) position of the ignition switch.
Instruments and controls 2-29
Engine start operation for Intelligent Key Low Fuel If the light comes on while the engine is running,
system (if I-Key battery is low) (if so you can drive the vehicle. However in these
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as
equipped)
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is soon as possible.
This indicator appears when the battery of the convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small re- Loose Fuel Cap
system and the vehicle are not communicating serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is
normally. gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty). not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been
If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped) refueled. For additional information, refer to
Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and
This warning illuminates when the windshield- adjustments” section of this manual.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-
washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-
telligent Key® battery discharge” in the “Starting Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
washer fluid as necessary. For additional informa-
and driving” section of this manual.
tion, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the This warning appears when the low tire pressure
Key ID Incorrect (if so equipped) “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire
manual. pressure is detected. The warning appears each
This warning appears when the ignition switch is time the ignition switch is placed in the ON
placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent Door/liftgate Open position as long as the low tire pressure warning
Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot light remains illuminated. If this warning appears,
This warning illuminates when a door has been
start the engine with an unregistered key. stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of
opened when the engine is running.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In- all four tires to the recommended COLD tire
Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual (if pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and
so equipped) tion label. For additional information, refer to
adjustments” section of this manual.
“Low tire pressure warning light” in this section
After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
Release Parking Brake
position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds in the “Starting and driving” section of this
This warning illuminates in the message area of and then turns off. manual.
the vehicle information display when the parking
The Key System Error message warns of a mal-
brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
function with the Intelligent Key system. If the light
comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be
impossible to start the engine.
2-30 Instruments and controls
Flat Tire – Visit Dealer (if so equipped) vehicle with the engine idling, as soon as it is safe Power turned off to save the battery
to do so. Then if the warning turns off, you can This warning appears after the ignition switch is
This warning appears when the low tire pressure
continue driving. automatically turned off to save the battery.
warning light in the meter illuminates and one or
more flat tires are detected while driving. A chime All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Tire Size Incorrect: Reminder: Turn OFF headlights
also sounds for approximately 10 seconds. See Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the headlights are
Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle This warning may appear if there is a large differ- left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle.
ence between the diameters of the front and rear Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO
This warning appears in message area of the
wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area, with the position. For additional information, refer to
vehicle information display if low oil pressure is
engine idling. Check that all the tire sizes are the “Headlight and turn signal switch” in this section.
detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate
same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the
low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is Timer Alert – Time for a driver break?
tires are not excessively worn.
not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use This indicator appears when the set time is reached.
the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery The time can be set up to six hours. For setting the
information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Mainte- timer, refer to “Timer alert” in this section.
This warning appears when the battery is low and
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
needs to be charged. Low Outside Temperature
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Error: See Owner’s
Extended Storage Fuse This warning appears if the outside temperature
Manual (if so equipped)
is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be
This warning may appear if the extended storage changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For
This warning appears when the all-wheel drive
fuse switch is not pushed in (switched on). When additional information, refer to “Temperature” in
system is not functioning properly while the en-
this warning appears, push in (switch on) the this section.
gine is running.
extended storage fuse switch to turn off the
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) High Temp. Stop warning. For additional information, refer to “Ex- Chassis Control System Error: See Own-
Vehicle (if so equipped) tended Storage Switch” in this section. er’s Manual

This warning may appear while trying to free a Power will turn off to save the battery This warning appears if the chassis control mod-
stuck vehicle due to increased oil temperature. ule detects an error in the chassis control system.
This warning appears in message area of the Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
The driving mode may change to 2-Wheel Drive
vehicle information display after a period of time if For additional information, refer to “Chassis Con-
(2WD). If this warning is displayed, stop the
the shift lever has not moved from the P (Park) trol” in the “Starting and driving” section of this
position. manual.
Instruments and controls 2-31
SECURITY SYSTEMS

Cruise indicator The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
This indicator shows the cruise control system
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-
status.
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a
When cruise control is activated, a green circle brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in
will illuminate to indicate it is set. The vehicle the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when
information display will also display the speed the unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and
cruise control was set at. If you accelerate past park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
the set speed, the speed will blink until you either
Many devices offering additional protection, such
cancel cruise control or go back to the set speed.
as component locks, identification markers, and
If cruise control is on and cancelled, the speed
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
will be displayed to show the speed the vehicle
stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer
will return to if the resume button his activated.
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
Transmission Shift Position Indicator insurance company to see if you may be eligible
LIC2385 for discounts for various theft protection features.
This indicator shows the transmission shift posi- Your vehicle may have two types of security systems:
tion. How to arm the vehicle security
● Vehicle security system system
CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
This warning illuminates when the there is a prob- 1. Close all windows. (The system can be
lem with the CVT system. If this warning comes VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM armed even if the windows are open.)
on, have the system checked by a NISSAN 2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
dealer. The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the 3. Close all doors, hood and trunk/liftgate.
Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual doors, trunk, liftgate or the hood when the system Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with
This warning appears when the Blind Spot Warn- is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection the Intelligent Key, door handle request
ing or Forward Emergency Braking systems are type system that activates when a vehicle is switch (if so equipped), power door lock
not functioning properly. moved or when a vibration occurs. switch or mechanical key.

2-32 Instruments and controls


4. Confirm that the security indicator light ● The alarm automatically turns off after a pe- Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
comes on. The security light stays on for riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates if
FCC Notice:
about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys- the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm
tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec- can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door For USA:
onds the vehicle security system automati- with the key, or by pressing the button This device complies with Part 15 of the
cally shifts into the armed phase. The on the Intelligent Key. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
security light begins to flash once every The alarm is activated by: lowing two conditions: (1) This device may
three seconds. If, during the 30-second pre- ● opening the door or hood without using the not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
arm time period, the driver’s door is un- key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is device must accept any interference re-
locked by the key or the key fob, or the unlocked by releasing the door inside lock ceived, including interference that may
ignition switch is placed in the ACC (if so switch). cause undesired operation.
equipped) or ON position, the system will
not arm. How to stop an activated alarm NOTE:
● Even when the driver and/or passen- The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will door or the trunk/liftgate with the key, pressing proved by the party responsible for compli-
activate with all the doors, hood and the button on the Intelligent Key, or press- ance could void the user’s authority to op-
trunk lid locked with the ignition switch ing the request switch on the driver’s or passen- erate the equipment.
placed in the LOCK position. When ger’s door with the Intelligent Key in range of the For Canada:
placing the ignition switch in the ACC door handle.
(if so equipped) or ON position, the This device complies with Industry Canada
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-
system will be released.
SYSTEM tion is subject to the following two condi-
Vehicle security system activation The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-
allow the engine to start without the use of a ference, and (2) this device must accept any
The vehicle security system will give the following registered key. interference received, including interfer-
alarm: ence that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
● The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.

Instruments and controls 2-33


WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH


2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-
tion
Lift the lever up 䊊
4 to have one sweep operation
(MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you 䊊 5 to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
LIC0474 LIC2661 accident. Warm the windshield with the
Security indicator light SWITCH OPERATION defroster before you wash the windshield.
The security indicator light blinks whenever the The windshield wiper and washer operates when
ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or CAUTION
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
ACC (if so equipped) position. This function in- ● Do not operate the washer continuously
dicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the for more than 30 seconds.
is operational. following speed:
● Do not operate the washer if the
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
functioning, the light will remain on while the

1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
can be adjusted by turning the knob toward empty.
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
䊊A (Slower) or 䊊 B (Faster). Also, the inter-
If the light still remains on and/or the en- mittent operation speed varies in accor-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser- when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
tent operation speed will be faster.)
registered keys that you have when visiting
a NISSAN dealer for service.
2-34 Instruments and controls
● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid 䊊
2 Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-
reservoir with windshield-washer fluid tion
concentrates at full strength. Some Push the switch forward 䊊 3 to operate the
methyl alcohol based windshield- washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
washer fluid concentrates may perma-
nently stain the grille if spilled while WARNING
filling the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir. In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the window and ob-
● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con- scure your vision. Warm the rear window
centrates with water to the manufactur- with the defroster before you wash the
er’s recommended levels before pour- rear window.
ing the fluid into the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to CAUTION
LIC2662
mix the windshield-washer fluid con- ● Do not operate the washer continuously
centrate and water. REAR SWITCH OPERATION for more than 30 seconds.
If the windshield wiper operation is inter- If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted ● Do not operate the washer if the
rupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop by snow, etc., the wiper may stop moving to windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper empty.
turn the wiper switch to the OFF position switch to OFF and remove the snow, etc. on and
and remove the snow or ice that is on and ● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
around the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn reservoir with windshield-washer fluid
around the wiper arms. In approximately the switch ON again to operate the wiper.
1 minute, turn the switch on again to op- concentrates at full strength. Some
erate the wiper. The rear window wiper and washer operate when methyl alcohol based windshield-
the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the washer fluid concentrates may perma-
switch clockwise from the OFF position to oper- nently stain the grille if spilled while
ate the wiper. filling the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir.

1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
(not adjustable)

Instruments and controls 2-35


REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con- NOTE:
centrates with water to the manufactur- The top and bottom few rows of wires on
er’s recommended levels before pour- the rear window are not part of the rear
ing the fluid into the windshield-washer window defroster system. These wires
fluid reservoir. Do not use the make up the antenna for the audio system.
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid con-
centrate and water.

LIC2614
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.

2-36 Instruments and controls


HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

LIC2634 LIC2635 LIC2636


Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) Autolight system (if so equipped)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CAUTION The autolight system allows the headlights to turn
Lighting on and off automatically. The autolight system
Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle can:

1 Rotate the switch to the position, and battery. ● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
the front parking, tail, license plate, and in-
license plate and instrument panel lights au-
strument panel lights will come on.
tomatically when it is dark.

2 Rotate the switch to the position, and ● Turn off all the lights when it is light.
the headlights will come on and all the other
lights remain on. ● Keep all the lights on for a period of time after
you place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and all doors are closed.

Instruments and controls 2-37


NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the time
delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted.
For additional information, refer to “Ve-
hicle information display” in this section.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion 䊊1 .

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.


3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a LIC3051 LIC2637
door is opened and left open, the headlights
remain ON for a period of time. If another door is Be sure you do not put anything on top of Headlight beam select
opened while the headlights are on, then the the autolight sensor located in the top side
timer is reset. 䊊1 of the instrument panel. The autolight 䊊
1 To select the high beam function, push the
sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov- lever forward. The high beam lights come on
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is and the light illuminates.
the OFF, , or position. dark out and the headlights will illuminate.
If this occurs while parked with the engine 䊊
2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, your vehicle’s battery could be-

3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.
come discharged.
Battery saver system
The battery saver automatically turns off the igni-
tion after a period of time when the ignition switch
is left in the ACC (if so equipped) or ON position.

2-38 Instruments and controls


Automatic headlight aiming control (if Select the switch position by referring to the
so equipped) following sample.

Vehicles with LED headlights may be equipped Switch


Vehicle Load
with an automatic levelling system. The headlight Position
axis is controlled automatically. Driver only or Driver/front pas-
0
NISSAN recommends that you should consult senger
the local regulations on the use of lights. Driver/front seat passenger/rear
1
seat passengers
Driver/front seat passenger/rear
seat passengers/cargo or driver/ 2
cargo/no trailer
Fully loaded/no trailer 3
LIC0662
Manual headlight aiming control (if so DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
equipped) The daytime running lights automatically illumi-
Depending on the number of occupants in the nate when the engine is started with the parking
vehicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight brake released. The daytime running lights oper-
axis may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is ate with the headlight switch in the OFF position
traveling on a hilly road, the headlights may di- or in the position. Turn the headlight switch
rectly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead to the position for full illumination when
or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle. The driving at night.
light axis can be lowered with the operation of the If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
switch. started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
The larger the number designated on the switch, nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the lower the axis. the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
When traveling without a heavy load or on a flat
road, select position 0. is placed in the OFF position.

Instruments and controls 2-39


WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC2624 LIC2638
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
CONTROL Turn signal
Press the “-” button 䊊
A to decrease the bright-

1 Move the lever up or down to signal the
ness of instrument panel lights. turning direction. When the turn is com-
Press the “+” button 䊊B to increase the bright- pleted, the turn signal cancels automatically.
ness of instrument panel lights. Lane change signal

2 Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not
latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever
until the lane change is completed.
Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not
latch, and release the lever. The turn signal
will automatically flash three times.
2-40 Instruments and controls
HORN

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane


change based on road and traffic conditions.
For additional information on disabling the 3 flash
pass turn indicator, refer to “How to use the
Vehicle information display” in “Vehicle Informa-
tion Display” in this section.

LIC2639 LIC2319
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the
steering wheel.
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
to the position, then turn the fog light WARNING
switch to the position.
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch could affect proper operation of the
in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
then turn the fog light switch to the posi- pering with the supplemental front air bag
tion. system may result in serious personal
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch injury.
to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.
Instruments and controls 2-41
HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

WARNING ● When cleaning the seat, never use


gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
lar materials.
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
monitor elevated seat temperatures or ● If any malfunctions are found or the
have an inability to feel pain in body parts heated seat does not operate, turn the
that contact the seat. Use of the seat switch off and have the system checked
heater by such people could result in seri- by a NISSAN dealer.
ous injury.

CAUTION
● The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
LIC2670
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. ● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
1. Start the engine. seat.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as ● Do not put anything on the seat which
desired. The indicator light in the switch will insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
illuminate. ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off. ● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
The indicator light will remain on as long as the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
the switch is on.
heater.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you ● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch should be removed immediately with a
off. dry cloth.

2-42 Instruments and controls


VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK SPORT MODE SWITCH
OFF SWITCH SWITCH (if so equipped)

LIC2315 LIC2645 LIC2417


The vehicle should be driven with the VDC sys- The all-wheel drive (AWD) lock switch is located Adjusts the engine and transmission points to
tem on for most driving conditions. on the instrument panel. The AWD LOCK indica- enhance performance. Press the SPORT button
tor light will illuminate when the switch is turned on the instrument panel to activate. “SPORT”
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
on. For additional information, refer to “Warning appears in the speedometer for two seconds.
system reduces the engine output to reduce
lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
this section. NOTE:
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck Each time you push the switch, the AWD mode In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be
vehicle, turn the VDC system off. will switch: AUTO →LOCK → AUTO. reduced.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The indicator will come on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Instruments and controls 2-43
HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if
so equipped)

● The hill descent control may not control ● the hill descent control system switch must
the vehicle speed on a hill under all load be ON.
or road conditions. Always be prepared The vehicle speed must be kept below 15 mph
to depress the brake pedal to control (25 km/h).
vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-
sult in a collision or serious personal The hill descent control indicator light will come
injury. on when the system is activated. Also, the
stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent
control system applies the brakes to control ve-
CAUTION hicle speed.
When the hill descent control system op-
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed
erates continuously for a long time, the
while the hill descent control system is on, the
temperature of the brake pads may in-
system will stop operating temporarily. As soon
crease and the hill descent control system
as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the
LIC2664 may be temporarily disabled (the indicator
hill descent control system begins to function
light will blink). If the indicator light does
WARNING again if the hill descent control operating condi-
not come on continuously after blinking,
tions are fulfilled.
● Never rely solely on the hill descent stop using the system.
control system to control vehicle speed The hill descent control indicator light blinks if the
The hill descent control system is designed to switch is on and all conditions for system activa-
when driving on steep downhill grades.
reduce driver workload when going down steep tion are not met or if the system becomes disen-
Always drive carefully when using the
hills. The hill descent control system helps to gaged for any reason.
hill descent control system and deceler-
ate the vehicle speed by depressing the control vehicle speed so the driver can concen-
trate on steering the vehicle. To turn off the hill descent control system, push
brake pedal if necessary. Be especially the switch to the OFF position.
careful when driving on frozen, muddy To activate the hill descent control system:
or extremely steep downhill roads. Fail- For additional information, refer to “Hill descent
ure to control vehicle speed may result ● activate the AWD LOCK switch, control system on indicator light” in this section
in a loss of control of the vehicle and and “Hill descent control system” in the “Starting
● the transmission shift lever must be in for- and driving” section of this manual.
possible serious injury or death. ward or reverse gear,

2-44 Instruments and controls


WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so
equipped) equipped)

formation, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)


system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.

LIC2225 LIC3357
The warning systems switch is used to turn on The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in com-
and off the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system bination with a NissanConnectSM Services sub-
that is activated using the settings menu on the scription to call for assistance in case of an
vehicle information display. emergency.

When the warning systems switch is turned off, Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscription)
the indicator 䊊
1 on the switch is off. The indicator reach a Response Specialist that will provide
will also be off if the warning system is deacti- assistance based on the situation described by
vated using the settings menu. the vehicle’s occupant. For additional informa-
tion, or to enroll your vehicle, refer to
The BSW system will turn on the BSW indicator www.NissanUSA.com/connect or call
light, located next to the outside mirrors, if the 855–426–6628.
radar detects a vehicle in the detection zone. If
the turn signal is activated in the direction of the
detected vehicle, a chime sounds twice and the
BSW indicator light will flash. For additional in-
Instruments and controls 2-45
POWER OUTLETS

NOTE:
● When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
front and center console power outlets stop
delivering power one minute after the door is
opened and stays open.
● If the door remains closed after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the front and
center console power outlets continue to
deliver power until the accessory power
timer has elapsed.
● The cargo area power outlet(s) continues to
deliver power normally.
LIC2615 LIC2616
Instrument Panel Center Console
12V OUTLETS CAUTION
The power outlets are for powering electrical ● The outlet and plug may be hot during
accessories such as cellular telephones. They or immediately after use.
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
● Only certain power outlets are designed
The front and center console power outlets are for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
powered only when the ignition switch is in the not use any other power outlet for an
ON position, or while the accessory power is accessory lighter. See a NISSAN dealer
active. for additional information.
● Do not use with accessories that exceed
a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
● Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.

2-46 Instruments and controls


EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If


good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.

LIC2617 LDI2758
Cargo Area The extended storage switch is used when ship-
● Use power outlets with the engine run- ping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse panel to
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle the left of the steering wheel on the instrument
battery. panel. If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, ensure the extended storage switch is
● Avoid using power outlets when the air pushed fully in place, as shown.
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.

Instruments and controls 2-47


STORAGE

LIC3266 LIC3268 LIC2618

SEATBACK POCKETS ● Do not place heavy loads heavier than


2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head
There is a pocket located on the back of the driver
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
and passenger seats. These pockets can be
pocket.
used to store maps.

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passen-
ger’s advanced air bag system, please ob-
serve the following items:
● Do not allow a passenger in the 2nd row
to push or pull on the seatback pocket.

2-48 Instruments and controls


CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

LIC2312 LIC2619

SUNGLASSES HOLDER Front console

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.


CUP HOLDERS
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s
view and to help prevent an accident.

Instruments and controls 2-49


CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

LIC2620 LIC2622
2nd row Bottle holder — front
CAUTION
Do not recline the rear seatback when you
use the cup holders on the rear armrest.
Doing so may cause the beverages to spill
over, and if they are hot, they may scald
the passengers.

2-50 Instruments and controls


LIC2623 LIC2837 LIC2890
Bottle holder — rear Bottle holder — 3rd row (if so equipped) GLOVE BOX
CAUTION Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
● Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in WARNING
the vehicle and possibly injure people Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
during sudden braking or an accident. help prevent injury in an accident or a
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid sudden stop.
containers.

Instruments and controls 2-51


WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure
cargo.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-
gage area. It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.
WIC1504 LIC2629 In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
CONSOLE BOX LUGGAGE HOOKS injured or killed.
To open the console box, press in on the lever 䊊
1 When securing items using luggage hooks lo- ● Do not allow people to ride in any area
and raise the lid 䊊
2 . cated on the back of the seat or side finisher do of your vehicle that is not equipped with
To close, push the lid down until the lock latches. not apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs (29 N) to seats and seat belts.
a single hook. ● The child restraint top tether strap may
The luggage hooks that are located on the floor be damaged by contact with items in
should have loads less than 110 lbs (490 N) to a the cargo area. Secure any items in the
single hook. cargo area. Your child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in a collision if
The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo the top tether strap is damaged.
with ropes or other types of straps.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.

2-52 Instruments and controls


LIC2625 LIC2646 LIC2647
CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN (if so DIVIDE-N-HIDE® ADJUSTABLE To move the adjustable floor from the
equipped) FLOOR (if so equipped) lower position to the upper position:
1. Use the handle to lift the adjustable floor.
WARNING WARNING
2. Move the adjustable floor to the upper guide
If your vehicle is equipped with 3rd row Do not put objects heavier than 165 lbs track and ensure it is secure in place.
seating, do not attempt to store/place a (75 kg) on the Divide-N-Hide® while in the
spare tire in the cargo area storage area. mid position. In the upper position, ob-
In a collision a spare tire could become jects should not weigh more than 30 lbs
loose and strike a person resulting in se- (14 kg).
vere injury or death.
There are multiple positions for the adjust-
To access the floor storage area, pull up on the able floor. The upper position allows for
handle to lift the luggage board. additional storage below the adjustable
floor.

Instruments and controls 2-53


CARGO COVER (if so equipped) – If the cargo cover contacts the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
WARNING top tether anchor, remove the cargo
● Never put anything on the cargo cover, cover from the vehicle or secure it on
no matter how small. Any object on it the cargo floor below its attachment
could cause an injury in an accident or location. If the cargo cover is not re-
sudden stop. moved, it may damage the top tether
strap during a collision.
● Do not put objects heavier than 44 lbs
(20 kg) on the cargo cover for long peri- – Do not allow cargo to contact the top
ods of time. tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor. Properly secure
● Do not leave the cargo cover in the the cargo so it does not contact the
vehicle with it disengaged from the top tether strap. Cargo that is not
holder. properly secured or that contacts the
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or top tether strap may damage the top
straps to help prevent it from sliding or tether strap during a collision.
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● Your child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child restraint
WIC1003
top tether strap is damaged.
The cargo cover keeps the luggage compartment
contents hidden from the outside.
Only attach the hook and loop fastener on the
cargo cover privacy cloth to the area on the rear
seatback where it is supposed to be attached.
Otherwise, the seat surface could be damaged.
2-54 Instruments and controls
To remove the cargo cover: Do not apply any load directly to the roof side
rails. Cross bars must be installed before apply-

1 Remove the straps from the rear hatch.
ing load/cargo/luggage to the roof of the vehicle.

2 Remove the edge of the cargo cover privacy
Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the
cloth from the rear seatback.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its

3 Remove the cargo cover holders from the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and
rear pillar. rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (lo-
cated on the driver’s door pillar). For additional
information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer
to “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this
manual.
LIC2386
WARNING
ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is
Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars are avail- loaded at or near the cargo carrying
able through a NISSAN dealer. Contact a capacity, especially if the significant
NISSAN dealer for crossbar or other equipment portion of that load is carried on the
information. cross bars.
Always distribute the luggage evenly on the cross ● Heavy loading of the cross bars has the
bars. Do not load more than 150 lb (68 kg) on the potential to affect the vehicle stability
cross bars. Observe the maximum load limit and handling during sudden or unusual
shown on the cross bars or roof carriers when handling maneuvers.
you attach them on the roof cross bars. Contact a ● Roof rack cross bars should be evenly
NISSAN dealer for crossbar or other equipment distributed.
information.
● Do not exceed maximum roof rack cross
bars load.

Instruments and controls 2-55


WINDOWS

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or POWER WINDOWS The power windows operate when the ignition
straps to help prevent it from sliding or switch is placed in the ON position, or for a
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, WARNING period of time after the ignition switch is placed in
unsecured cargo could cause personal the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
● Make sure that all passengers have door is opened during this period of time, the
injury. their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while power to the windows is canceled.
it is in motion and before closing the
CAUTION windows. Use the window lock switch to
Always install the cross bars onto the roof prevent unexpected use of the power
side rails before loading cargo of any kind. windows.
Loading cargo directly onto the roof side ● Do not leave children unattended inside
rails or the vehicle’s roof may cause ve- the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
hicle damage. tivate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
dren could become involved in serious
accidents.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.

2-56 Instruments and controls


The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the first
detent and continue to hold down until the de-
sired window position is reached. To close a
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold up until the desired window
position is reached.
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
LIC3208
function. LIC2309
Driver’s side power window switches Front passenger’s power window
1. Window lock button switch
2. Power door lock switch The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
3. Front passenger side switch the window partially, push the switch down 䊊 1

4. Right rear passenger side switch lightly until the desired window position is
reached. To close the window partially, pull the
5. Left rear passenger side switch switch up 䊊 2 until the desired window position is

6. Driver side automatic switch reached.

Instruments and controls 2-57


Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
curs.

WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
LIC2663 LIC0410 cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
Rear power window switch Automatic operation the vehicle before closing the window.
The rear power window switches open or close To fully open a window equipped with automatic If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,
only the corresponding windows. To open the operation, press the window switch down to the or jump started, the power window auto-reverse
window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊1 . To second detent and release it; it need not be held. function may not operate properly. If this occurs,
close the window, pull the switch up 䊊2 .
The window automatically opens all the way. To please contact the dealer to re-initialize the
stop the window, lift the switch up while the power window auto-reverse system.
window is opening. If the control unit detects something caught in a
To fully close a window equipped with automatic window equipped with automatic operation, as it
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent is closing, the window will be immediately low-
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the ered.
window, press the switch down while the window
is closing.

2-58 Instruments and controls


POWER PANORAMIC MOONROOF (if
so equipped)

Sliding the moonroof WARNING


To fully open or close the moonroof, push the There are some small distances immedi-
switch to the open 䊊1 or close 䊊 2 position and ately before the closed position which
release it; it need not be held. The roof will cannot be detected. Make sure that all
automatically open or close all the way. To stop passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the roof, push the switch once more while it is the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
opening or closing.
When closing
Tilting the moonroof If the control unit detects something caught in the
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push the moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
switch to the tilt up position 䊊1 and release it; it will immediately open backward.
need not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push When tilting down
the switch to the tilt down position 䊊 2 .
LIC2644 If the control unit detects something caught in the
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition Auto-reverse function (when closing or moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-
switch is placed in the ON position. The moon- tilting down the moonroof) mediately tilt up.
roof is operational for a period of time, even if the If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-
ignition switch is placed in the ACC (if so The auto-reverse function can be activated when
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
equipped) or OFF position. If the driver’s door or the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto- pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
the front passenger’s door is opened during this matic operation when the ignition switch is after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
period of time, the power to the moonroof is placed in the ON position or for a period of time gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
canceled. after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF moonroof.
position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.

Instruments and controls 2-59


To close the sunshade: ● Do not push the sunshade arm with
WARNING
● In an accident you could be thrown from ● To fully close the sunshade, push the switch your hands, etc., as this may deform it.
the vehicle through an open moonroof. 䊊2 toward the close position. Improper operation or damage to the
sunshade may result.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints. WARNING ● Do not put any object into the sunshade
● To avoid personal injury, keep your inlet port as this may result in improper
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
hands, fingers and head away from the operation or damage the sunshade.
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle sunshade arm, the arm rail and sun- ● Do not hang any object on the arm rail
is in motion or while the moonroof is shade inlet port. as this may result in improper operation
closing. ● Do not allow children near the rear sun- or damage the sunshade.
shade system. They could be injured. ● Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. Do-
CAUTION ing so may elongate the sunshade. Im-
● Do not place objects on or near the rear
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand sunshade. This could cause improper proper operation or damage to the sun-
from the moonroof before opening. operation or damage it. shade may result.
● Do not place heavy objects on the ● Do not pull or push the rear sunshade. If the moonroof does not close
moonroof or surrounding area. This could cause improper operation or
Have a NISSAN dealer check and repair the
damage it.
Panoramic sunshade moonroof.
The panoramic sunshade operates when the ig- CAUTION
nition switch is in the ON position. When opening ● Do not place objects (such as newspa-
or closing the sunshade the switch need not be pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sun-
held. shade inlet port. Doing so may entangle
To open the sunshade: these objects in the sunshade when it is
extending or retracting, causing im-
● To fully open the sunshade, push the switch proper operation or damage to the
䊊1 toward the open position.
sunshade.

2-60 Instruments and controls


INTERIOR LIGHTS

NOTE:
The footwell lights and step lights illumi-
nate when the driver and passenger doors
are open regardless of the interior light
switch position. These lights will turn off
automatically after a period of time while
doors are open to prevent the battery from
becoming discharged.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
LIC2302 LIC2303
When the ON switch 䊊 1 is pressed, the footwell CONSOLE LIGHT
lights (if so equipped), step lights (if so
equipped), map lights and rear personal lights The console light will turn on whenever the park-
ing lights or headlights are illuminated.
will automatically turn on and stay on for a period
of time when: The console light brightness can be adjusted
with the illumination brightness control.
● The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent
Key, a key or the request switch (if so
equipped) while all doors are closed and the
ignition switch is in the OFF position.
● When individually pushed.
When the OFF switch 䊊 2 is pushed, the interior
lights do not illuminate even when pushed. When
the DOOR/OFF switch is pressed and the ON
switch is pressed, all of the lights will come on.
Instruments and controls 2-61
CARGO LIGHT

LIC2304 LIC1083 SIC2063A


MAP LIGHTS Rear personal lights The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-
PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped) position switch. To operate, push the switch to
Push the button to turn the map lights on. To turn the desired position.
them off, press the button again. To turn the rear personal lights on, push the
switch. To turn them off, push the switch again. 䊊1 ON: The light is illuminated.

CAUTION 䊊2 DOOR: The light illuminates when the lift-


gate is opened. The light turns off when the
Do not use for extended periods of time liftgate is closed.
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery. 䊊 OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless
3
of liftgate position or lock status.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.

2-62 Instruments and controls


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24


Remote keyless entry (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Operating the manual liftgate
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 3-3 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Operating the power liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . 3-24
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Motion activated liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Power liftgate main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Liftgate release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Liftgate position setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-7 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Card holder (driver’s side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
How to use the remote keyless entry Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
KEYS

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (if so


equipped)
CAUTION
Do not leave the ignition key inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.
LPD2197 LPD2192
1. Jackknife type key A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all your keys. If you still have a key, a NISSAN
Storing remote keyless entry
2. Integrated door lock key fob with
dealer can duplicate it. To lock or unlock the vehicle using the key press
transponder chip the release button 䊊1 to unfold the key from the
3. Key number plate fob.
When storing the key press the release button 䊊 1
and push key 䊊2 to fold the key back into fob slot
䊊3 .

Never leave keys in vehicle.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


memory in the Intelligent Key components when
registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent
Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
LPD0350 WPD0427
from. If you still have a key, a NISSAN dealer can
duplicate it.
Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)
1. Intelligent Key (two sets) NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so CAUTION
2. Mechanical key equipped) Listed below are conditions or occur-
3. Key number plate (one plate)
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent rences which will damage the Intelligent
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel- Key:
ligent Key System components and NISSAN Ve- ● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
hicle Immobilizer System components. contains electrical components, to
Never leave these keys in the vehicle. come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis- function.
tered and used with one vehicle. The new keys
must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to ● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
use with the Intelligent Key System and NISSAN ● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since against another object.
the registration process requires erasing all
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent CAUTION
Key.
Always carry the mechanical key installed
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent in the Intelligent Key slot.
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry. For additional information, refer to “Doors” in this
section.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem- NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
peratures exceed 60°C (140°F). SYSTEM KEYS
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
You can only drive your vehicle using the master
key holder that contains a magnet.
keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
equipment that produces a magnetic These keys have a transponder chip in the key
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and SPA1951 head.
personal computers. Mechanical key The master key can be used for all the locks.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key. Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the To remove the mechanical key, release the lock Additional or replacement keys:
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. If you still have a key, the key number is not
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to Immobilizer System keys. A NISSAN dealer can
the lock position. duplicate your existing key. As many as four
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the used with one vehicle. You should bring all
driver’s door. NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that
you have to the NISSAN dealer for registration.
This is because the registration process will
erase the memory of all key codes previously
registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
DOORS

System. After the registration process, these When the doors are locked using one of the
components will only recognize keys coded into following methods, the doors cannot be opened
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during using the inside or outside door handles. The
registration. Any key that is not given to the dealer doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
at the time of registration will no longer be able to
start your vehicle. WARNING
● Before opening any door, always look
CAUTION
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
Do not allow the immobilizer system key,
● Do not leave children unattended inside
which contains an electrical transponder,
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
to come into contact with water or salt
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
water. This could affect system function.
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
LPD2129
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance Driver’s side
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets LOCKING WITH KEY
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
others through inadvertent operation of shown.
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, Manual
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the
severe or possibly fatal injuries to vehicle 䊊1 . To unlock, turn the key toward the rear
people or animals. 䊊2 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5


LPD0461 SPA2726 LPD2093
Driver’s side Inside lock LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
Power LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK LOCK SWITCH
The power door lock system allows you to lock or KNOB To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
unlock all doors at the same time. To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
Turning the key toward the front 䊊
1 of the vehicle lock knob to the lock position 䊊
1 , then close the the lock position 䊊1 . When locking the door this
locks all doors. door. way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊
2 of the To unlock the door without the key, move the
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊
2 . To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
returning the key to neutral 䊊
3 (where the key can door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
only be removed and inserted) and turning it side) to the unlock position 䊊
2 .
toward the rear again 䊊 4 within 5 seconds un-
locks all doors.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(if so equipped)

Lockout protection WARNING


When the power door lock switch is moved to the ● Radio waves could adversely affect
lock position with any door open and the Intelli- electric medical equipment. Those who
gent Key is left in the vehicle, all doors will unlock use a pacemaker should contact the
automatically and a chime will sound after the electric medical equipment manufac-
door is closed. turer for the possible influences before
This function helps to prevent the Intelligent Key use.
from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle. ● The remote keyless entry key fob trans-
mits radio waves when the buttons are
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS pressed. The FAA advises radio waves
● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle may affect aircraft navigation and com-
speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). munication systems. Do not operate the
remote keyless entry key fob while on
● All doors unlock automatically when the ig- LPD2374 an airplane. Make sure the buttons are
nition is placed in the OFF position (models not operated unintentionally when the
with Intelligent Key system) or when the key CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
unit is stored for a flight.
is removed from the ignition switch (models Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
without Intelligent Key system). from being opened accidentally, especially when It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the
small children are in the vehicle. interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by
using the key fob from outside the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors. Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle
When the lever is in the LOCK position, the before locking the doors.
door can be opened only from the outside. The key fob can operate at a distance of approxi-
mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective
distance depends on the conditions around the
vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7


As many as four key fobs can be used with one ● Do not place the key fob for an ex-
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase tended period in an area where tem-
and use of additional key fobs, contact a NISSAN peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
dealer.
● Do not attach the key fob with a key
The key fob will not function when: holder that contains a magnet.
● the battery is discharged ● Do not place the key fob near equip-
ment that produces a magnetic field,
● the distance between the vehicle and the such as a TV, audio equipment and per-
key fob is over 33 ft (10 m) sonal computers.
The panic alarm will not activate when the If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
key is in the ignition switch. ommends erasing the ID code of that key
fob. This will prevent the key fob from
CAUTION unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. LPD2193
Listed below are conditions or occur- For information regarding the erasing
rences which will damage the key fob: procedure, please contact a NISSAN HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
dealer. ENTRY SYSTEM
● Do not allow the key fob, which con-
tains electrical components, to come Locking doors
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function. 1. Remove the ignition key.
● Do not drop the key fob. 2. Close all the doors.
● Do not strike the key fob sharply 3. Push the LOCK button on the key
against another object. fob.
● Do not change or modify the key fob. ● All the doors will lock.
● Wetting may damage the key fob. If the ● The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
key fob gets wet, immediately wipe until horn beeps once .
it is completely dry.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


NOTE:
An auto-relock function will operate after a
full or partial unlock, when no further user
action occurs. The relock will operate ap-
proximately one minute after full or partial
unlock. The auto-relock function is can-
celled when any door is opened or the key
is inserted into the ignition.

LPD2194 LPD2195
Unlocking doors Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
● Press the UNLOCK button on the key you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
fob to unlock the driver’s door.
by pressing and holding the button on the
● The hazard indicator lights flash once. key fob for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm will stay on for a period of time.
● Press the UNLOCK button again
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The panic alarm stops when:
● it has run for a period of time, or
● any button is pressed on the key fob.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9


Using the interior lights NOTE:

Press the button on the key fob once to If you change the answer back horn and
turn on the interior lights. light flash feature with the key fob, the
vehicle information display screen will
For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”
show the current mode after the ignition
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
switch has been cycled from the OFF to the
manual.
ON position. The vehicle information dis-
play screen can also be used to change the
answer back horn mode. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Answer back horn” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
LPD2196 and buttons for at least two seconds.
Answer back horn feature The hazard indicator lights will flash three times to
confirm that the answer back horn feature has
If desired, the answer back horn feature can be been deactivated.
deactivated using the key fob. When deactivated
and the LOCK button is pushed the To activate: Press and hold the
hazard indicator flashes twice and when the and buttons for at least two seconds
once more.
UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the
The hazard indicator lights will flash once and the
hazard indicator nor the horn operates.
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)

● When the vehicle is parked near a parking


WARNING CAUTION
meter.
● Radio waves could adversely affect ● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
electric medical equipment. Those who you when operating the vehicle. In such cases, correct the operating conditions
use a pacemaker should contact the before using the Intelligent Key function or use
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the the mechanical key.
electric medical equipment manufac-
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
turer for the possible influences before Although the life of the battery varies depending
use. The Intelligent Key is always communicating with on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel- approximately two years. If the battery is dis-
waves when the buttons are pressed. ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves. charged, replace it with a new one.
The FAA advises the radio waves may Environmental conditions may interfere with the
affect aircraft navigation and communi- operation of the Intelligent Key system under the When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indi-
cation systems. Do not operate the In- following operating conditions: cator illuminates in the vehicle information dis-
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make play. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
sure the buttons are not operated unin- ● When operating near a location where information display” in the “Instruments and con-
tentionally when the unit is stored for a strong radio waves are transmitted, such as trols” section of this manual.
flight. a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station. Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
● When in possession of wireless equipment, which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-
door locks using the remote control function or
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, or a nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-
pushing the request switch on the vehicle without
CB radio. tery life may become shorter.
taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The
operating environment and/or conditions may af- ● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or For additional information, refer to “Battery re-
fect the Intelligent Key system operation. covered by metallic materials. placement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
Be sure to read the following before using the ● When any type of radio wave remote control yourself” section of this manual.
Intelligent Key system. is used nearby. As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-
● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an tered and used with one vehicle. For information
electric appliance such as a personal com- about the purchase and use of additional Intelli-
puter. gent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11


If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
CAUTION
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
Listed below are conditions or occur- gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
rences which will damage the Intelligent unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
Key: the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C). LPD2180
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a OPERATING RANGE
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
equipment that produces a magnetic when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and operating range from the request switch 䊊1 .
personal computers.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or ● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
strong radio waves are present near the operat- inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range Intelligent Key with you and then lock the
becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may doors.
not function properly.
● Do not pull the door handle before pushing
The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm) the door handle request switch. The door
from each request switch 䊊
1 . will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
open the door.
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may
not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the
WPD0375
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
● Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-
gent Key is outside the vehicle.
● After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13


LPD2181 LPD2182 LPD2183
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® Locking doors 5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and
OPERATION the outside buzzer sounds twice, unless the
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, answer back feature is deactivated, then
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- only the hazard lights will flash. For addi-
the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag. tion and make sure you carry the Intelligent
tional information, refer to “Answer back
Key with you.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you horn feature” in this section.
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door 2. Close all doors.
handle request switch within the range of opera- 3. Push any door handle request switch while
tion. carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


NOTE: NOTE:
CAUTION
● Request switches for all doors and the ● After locking the doors using the re- The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
liftgate can be deactivated when the quest switch, make sure that the doors gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-
I-Key Door Lock setting is turned off in have been securely locked by operating ating the request switch to lock the door.
the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle in- the door handles or the rear liftgate Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or
formation display. For additional infor- opener switch. your other hand.
mation, refer to “Vehicle information
● When locking the doors using the re- CAUTION
display” in the “Instruments and con-
quest switch, make sure to have the
trols” section of this manual. The lockout protection may not function
Intelligent Key in your possession be-
● Doors lock with the door handle re- fore operating the request switch to under the following conditions:
quest switch while the ignition switch prevent the Intelligent Key from being ● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
is not in the LOCK position. left in the vehicle. top of the instrument panel.
● Doors do not lock by pushing the door ● The request switch is operational only ● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
handle request switch while any door is when the Intelligent Key has been de- side the glove box or a storage bin.
tected by the Intelligent Key system.
open. However, doors lock with the ● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
mechanical key even if any door is Lockout protection side the door pockets.
open.
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci- ● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
● Doors do not lock with the door handle dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection side or near metallic materials.
request switch with the Intelligent Key is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.
inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to
warn you. However, when an Intelligent When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
locked with another Intelligent Key. inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door
buzzer sounds.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15


NOTE:
Request switches for all doors and liftgate
can be deactivated when the I-Key Door
Lock setting is turned off in the Vehicle
Settings of the vehicle information display.
For additional information, refer to “Ve-
hicle information display” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning
the door handle to its original position will unlock
the door. If the door does not unlock after return-
ing the door handle, push the door handle re-
LPD2182 LPD2183 quest switch to unlock the door.
Unlocking doors For power liftgate opening: All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within
1. Carry the Intelligent Key. 1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
one minute after pushing the request switch.
2. Push the door handle request switch. 2. Press the power liftgate request switch (if so
● Opening any door.
equipped) or use a kicking motion between
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the ● Pushing the ignition switch.
the ground and the center portion of the rear
outside buzzer sounds once, unless the an-
bumper if equipped with the motion acti- The interior light timer illuminates for a period of
swer back feature is deactivated, then only
the hazard lights will flash. For additional vated liftgate. For additional information, re- time when a door is unlocked and the room light
information, refer to “Answer back horn fea- fer to “Motion activated liftgate” in this sec- switch is in the DOOR position.
ture” in this section. tion.

4. Push the door handle request switch again


within one minute to unlock all doors.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


The interior light can be turned off without waiting The remote keyless entry function will not func-
by performing one of the following operations: tion under the following conditions:
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi- ● When the Intelligent Key is not within the
tion. operational range.
● Locking the doors with the remote control. ● When the doors or the rear liftgate are open
or not closed securely.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position. ● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.
● Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF
position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle
information display. For additional informa- CAUTION
tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” in When locking the doors using the Intelli-
the “Instruments and controls” section. gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle. WPD0359
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION Locking doors
The remote keyless entry function can operate all 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
door locks using the remote keyless function of tion.
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function 2. Close all doors.
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance de- 3. Press the button on the Intelligent
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle. Key.
4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once, unless the answer
back feature is deactivated, then only the
hazard lights will flash. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Answer back horn feature”
in this section.
5. All doors will be locked.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
NOTE:
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelli- The unlocking operation can be changed in
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been Selective Unlock in the Vehicle Settings of
securely locked by operating the door the vehicle information display. For addi-
handles. tional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-
mation display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within
one minute after pressing the button:
● Opening any doors.

WPD0360 ● Pushing the ignition switch.


The interior light illuminates for a period of time
Unlocking doors when a door is unlocked and the room light
1. Press the button on the Intelligent switch is in the DOOR position.
Key. The light can be turned off without waiting by
2. The driver’s door will unlock and the hazard performing one of the following operations:
indicator lights flash once. ● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
3. Press the button again within five
seconds, the hazard indicator lights flash ● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
once and the remaining doors unlock.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


● Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the off When the button (if so equipped) is
position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle pressed during the open or close process the
information display. For additional informa- liftgate will stop. When pressed again, the liftgate
tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” in will reverse and go in the opposite direction.
the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

WPD0414
Releasing the rear liftgate (if so
equipped)
The rear liftgate can be opened and closed by
performing the following:
● Press the button (if so equipped) for
longer than 0.5 seconds to open the rear
liftgate.
● Press the button (if so equipped)
again for longer than 0.5 seconds to close
the rear liftgate.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19


The panic alarm stops when:
● It has run for a period of time, or
● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
● The request switch on the driver or passen-
ger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is
in range of the door handle.
Using the interior lights
Press the button on the key fob once to
turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
WPD0415 manual. WPD0362
Using the panic alarm Answer back horn feature
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
If desired, the answer back horn feature can be
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When it is
by pressing and holding the button on the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds. deactivated and the LOCK button is
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a pushed, the hazard indicator lights flash twice.
period of time. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, nei-
ther the hazard indicator lights nor the horn op-
erates.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


NOTE: WARNING SIGNALS
If you change the answer back horn and To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
light flash feature with the Intelligent Key, pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
the vehicle information display screen will Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
show the current mode after the ignition stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
switch has been cycled from the OFF to the outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
ON position. The vehicle information dis- the instrument panel.
play screen can also be used to change the
answer back horn mode. For additional in- When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
formation, refer to “Answer back horn” in displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the
the “Instruments and controls” section of Intelligent Key.
this manual. For additional information, refer to the “Trouble-
To deactivate: Press and hold the shooting guide” in this section and “Vehicle infor-
and buttons for at least 2 seconds. mation display” in the “Instruments and controls”
The hazard indicator lights will flash three times to section of this manual.
confirm that the answer back horn feature has
been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds once
more.
The hazard indicator lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
The red Shift to Park warning appears on
When stopping the engine the display and the inside warning chime The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
sounds continuously.
When shifting the shift lever to the P (Park) The Push ignition to OFF warning appears The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position on the display. position. position.
When opening the driver’s door to get out The Door Open warning appears on the The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
of the vehicle display. position. position.
The No Key Detected warning appears on
the display, the outside chime sounds three The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
times and the inside warning chime sounds position. position.
When closing the door after getting out of for approximately three seconds.
the vehicle
The red Shift to Park warning appears on The ignition switch is in the ACC position Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position
the display and the inside side chime and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) and place the ignition switch in the OFF
sounds continuously. position. position.
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
knob turned to LOCK three seconds and all the doors unlock.
When pushing the door handle request The outside chime sounds for approximately
switch or the LOCK button on the Intelli- The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
three seconds.
gent Key to lock the door
Replace the battery with a new one. For
The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears The battery charge is low. additional information, refer to “Battery re-
When pushing the ignition switch to start on the display. placement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
the engine yourself” section of this manual.
The yellow Key ID Incorrect warning ap- The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
pears on the display.
The Key System Error warning appears on It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent
When pushing the ignition switch Contact a NISSAN dealer.
the display. Key system.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


HOOD

WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Fail-
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.

LPD2266
1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊
1 located Hold the coated parts 䊊A when removing or
below the instrument panel until the hood resetting the support rod. Avoid direct con-
springs up slightly. tact with the metal parts, as they may be
2. Locate the lever 䊊2 in between the hood and hot immediately after the engine has been
grille and push the lever sideways with your stopped.
fingertips. When closing the hood, return the support rod to
3. Raise the hood 䊊
3 . its original position, lower the hood to approxi-
mately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release
4. Remove the support rod 䊊
4 and insert it into
it. This allows proper engagement of the hood
the slot 䊊
5 .
latch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23


LIFTGATE

WARNING OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE


(if so equipped)
● Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from open-
ing while driving. WARNING

● Do not drive with the liftgate open. This ● Make sure that all passengers have
could allow dangerous exhaust gases their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-
to be drawn into the vehicle. For addi- fore closing the liftgate.
tional information, refer to “Exhaust ● Do not leave children unattended inside
gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
and driving” section of this manual. tivate switches or controls. Unattended
● Do not leave children unattended inside children could become involved in seri-
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- ous accidents.
tivate switches or controls. Unattended LPD2184
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents. OPERATING THE MANUAL
● Always be sure that hands and feet are
LIFTGATE (if so equipped)
clear of the door frame to avoid injury The power door lock system allows you to lock or
while closing the liftgate. unlock all doors including the liftgate simultane-
ously.
CAUTION To open the liftgate, press the request switch 䊊
A
Do not use accessory carriers that attach and pull up on the handle.
to the rear hatch. Doing so will cause dam-
To close, lower and push the liftgate down se-
age to the vehicle.
curely.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


Power Open:
The power liftgate automatically moves from the
fully closed position to the fully open position in
approximately five – eight seconds. The power
open feature can be activated by the switch on
the key fob, the instrument panel switch, the
liftgate open switch or by the motion activated
liftgate system (if so equipped). The hazard lights
flash (when using the motion activated liftgate
system) and a chime sounds to indicate the
power open sequence has been started.

LPD2212 LPD2209
Instrument panel switch Liftgate opener switch
NOTE: ● When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate can
To open, close or reverse the power liftgate, be opened with the instrument panel switch
the shift lever must be in P (Park). Also, the or key fob.
power liftgate will not operate if battery ● The key fob button must be held for 0.5 sec-
voltage is low. ond before the liftgate opens.
● The liftgate must be unlocked (or the key fob
must be within range) to open with the lift-
gate open switch 䊊 A or with the motion
activated liftgate system (if so equipped).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25


● The liftgate open switch 䊊 A or motion acti- ● If the liftgate open switch 䊊
A is activated
vated liftgate system (if so equipped) can while the cinching motor is engaged, the
only be used to open the liftgate if the MAIN cinching motor will disengage and release
switch (located in Instrument Panel) is in the the latch.
ON position.
● The key fob button must be held for 0.5 sec-
A warning chime will sound if the shift lever is ond before the liftgate closes.
moved out of P (Park) during a power open
● The liftgate close switch 䊊 B or motion acti-
operation.
vated liftgate system (if so equipped) can
only be used to close the liftgate if the power
liftgate main switch is in the ON position.
Reverse:
The power liftgate will stop immediately during
power open or power close if the key fob, instru-
LPD2270
ment panel switch, liftgate close switch 䊊 B or
Power Close: motion activated liftgate system (if so equipped)
The power liftgate automatically moves from the is activated. If activated again the liftgate will
fully open position to the secondary position. reverse and go in the opposite direction. A chime
When the liftgate reaches the secondary posi- will sound to announce the reversal.
tion, the cinching motor engages and pulls the Auto Reverse:
liftgate to its primary latch position. Power close If an obstacle is detected during power open or
takes approximately seven – ten seconds. The power close, a warning chime will sound and the
power close feature can be activated by the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full
switch on the key fob, the instrument panel open or full close position. If a second obstacle is
switch, the liftgate close switch 䊊 B or motion detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the
activated liftgate system (if so equipped). A liftgate will enter manual mode.
chime sounds to indicate the power close se-
quence has been started.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the To open the liftgate manually, press the liftgate
liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip open switch 䊊A and raise the liftgate.
during power close, the liftgate will reverse direc-
To close, lower and push the liftgate down se-
tion and return to the full open position.
curely.
NOTE:
If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,
the power close function will not operate.

WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside LPD2184
the vehicle before closing the liftgate.
Manual Mode:
If power operation is not available, the liftgate
may be operated manually. Power operation may
not be available even if the power liftgate main
switch is in the ON position under the following
conditions:
● Multiple obstacles have been detected in a
single power cycle
● Battery voltage is low
If the power liftgate open switch 䊊 A is pushed
during power open or close, the power operation
will be canceled and the liftgate can be operated
manually.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27


LPD2391 LPD2392 LPD2389

MOTION ACTIVATED LIFTGATE (if so Example of a proper kick Proper kicking zone and method
equipped) NOTE: Positioned at the rear of the vehicle (center) at
arms’ length distance away, begin making the
To achieve proper motion activation, kick
The liftgate can be opened/closed using the mo- forward foot kicking motion. Move the foot into
within the kicking zone 䊊 A . Improper kick-
tion activated liftgate when it is locked or un- and under the rear bumper, then immediately pull
ing either from side to side 䊊C or at angles
locked. Two sensors along the rear bumper (cen- the foot back. The kicking motion should be
ter area) can detect a forward foot kicking 䊊D will not open/close the liftgate.
straight, smooth and consistent. Your leg does
motion䊊 B . The intelligent key must be present not need to touch the bumper surface but be
CAUTION
within 3 ft (1m) of the liftgate to allow using the within 3/4 inch (2cm) to 4 inches (10cm) of the
hands free feature to open/close the liftgate. Before making the foot kicking motion, bumper surface. After your foot motion is com-
steady your stance to prevent any loss of pleted step back to allow the liftgate to
balance. Also, while making the foot kick- open/close. The liftgate should begin moving
ing motion, take caution around hot ex- within 1-2 seconds after the kick. This time is
haust system parts. Otherwise, there may needed to verify the intelligent key and to validate
be danger of injury.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


CAUTION
Interference or malfunction can be caused
by being parked too close around radio or
satellite towers.

LPD2390 SPA2547
Improper kicking methods POWER LIFTGATE MAIN SWITCH
the kick motion. Kicking again within this time
frame (1-2 seconds) could cause the liftgate to The power liftgate operation can be turned on or
reverse or stop. off by the power liftgate main switch on the
instrument panel.
WARNING When the power liftgate main switch is pushed to
the OFF position, the power operation is not
Prevent unintentional liftgate available by the power liftgate switch on the
opening/closing. There may be conditions liftgate or liftgate open switch.
when opening/closing the liftgate is not
desired. Keep the intelligent key out of the Power operation is available when in the OFF
range of the liftgate (3ft or 1m), when position by the instrument panel switch and the
washing or working around the back of key fob button.
the vehicle. The motion activated liftgate will not function
when the power liftgate main switch is pushed in
the OFF position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
LIFTGATE RELEASE CAUTION
WARNING ● If the power liftgate does not stay open
or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at
● Always be sure the liftgate has been any time while a continuous warning
closed securely to prevent it from open- chime sounds, do not operate the lift-
ing while driving. gate. There may be a pressure loss in
● Do not drive with the liftgate open. This one or both of the liftgate struts. Have
could allow dangerous exhaust gases the liftgate inspected by a NISSAN
to be drawn into the vehicle. For addi- dealer.
tional information, refer to “Exhaust ● Do not activate the power liftgate if one
gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting or both of the liftgate struts are re-
and driving” section of this manual. moved. Damage to the liftgate or power
● To avoid personal injury, do not attempt liftgate mechanisms may occur.
LPD2375
to activate the power liftgate if one or ● Keep the power liftgate main switch in
both of the liftgate struts are removed. the OFF position when washing or Liftgate release (manual and power)
working around the back of the vehicle The liftgate release mechanism allows the liftgate
(with intelligent key) to prevent inadver-
to be opened in the event of a discharged battery.
tent opening/closing.
To release the liftgate from the inside of the
vehicle, perform the following operations:
1. Fold the rear seats down. For additional
information, refer to “Folding 3rd row bench
(if so equipped)” in the “Safety — seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.
2. Insert a suitable tool in the top access open-
ing hole. Move the release lever to the right.
The liftgate will be unlatched.
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3. Push the liftgate up to open. FUEL-FILLER CAP


NOTE: WARNING
If you had to open the liftgate using this ● Gasoline is extremely flammable and
lever, have your vehicle checked by a highly explosive under certain condi-
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. tions. You could be burned or seriously
LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
The liftgate can be set to open to a specific height
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
by performing the following:
near the vehicle when refueling.
1. Open the liftgate using the request switch, ● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
the Intelligent Key or the motion activated after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
liftgate system (if so equipped). automatically. Continued refueling may
2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired position LPD2022 cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
and hold the liftgate (the liftgate will have OPENER OPERATION spray and possibly a fire.
some resistance when being manually ad- ● Use only an original equipment type
justed). The fuel-filler door release is located below the fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull built-in safety valve needed for proper
3. While holding the liftgate in position, press
the release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door operation of the fuel system and emis-
and hold the liftgate switch located securely.
on the liftgate for approximately 5 seconds sion control system. An incorrect cap
or until two beeps are heard. can result in a serious malfunction and
The liftgate will open to the selected position possible injury. It could also cause
setting. To change the position of the liftgate, the Malfunction Indicator Light
repeat Steps 1-3 for setting the position of the (MIL) to come on.
liftgate. ● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31


● Do not fill a portable fuel container in ● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
can cause an explosion of flammable tightened. It may take a few driving trips
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or for the message to be displayed. Failure
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly
injury or death when filling portable fuel after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ap-
containers: pears may cause the Malfunction
– Always place the container on the Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
ground when filling. ● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
– Do not use electronic devices when properly may cause the Malfunc-
filling. tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
If the light illuminates because
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
with the container while you are fill- LPD2186
tighten or install the cap and continue
ing it.
to drive the vehicle. The light To remove the fuel-filler cap:
– Use only approved portable fuel con- should turn off after a few driving trips.
tainers for flammable liquid. 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to
If the light does not turn off after a remove.
few driving trips, have the vehicle in-
CAUTION spected by a NISSAN dealer. 2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊
1
while refueling.
● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your ● For additional information, refer to the
vehicle. For additional information, re- “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in To install the fuel-filler cap:
fer to the “Fuel recommendation” in the the “Instruments and controls” section
“Technical and consumer information” 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-
of this manual.
section of this manual. filler tube.
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
flush it away with water to avoid paint
single click is heard.
damage.

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


STEERING WHEEL

3. Press the next button 䊊 A on the steer-


WARNING
ing wheel for about one second to turn off
the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message ● Do not adjust the steering wheel while
䊊B after tightening the fuel-filler cap. driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
● Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and comfort.
The driver’s air bag inflates with great
force. If you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
LPD2203 air bag if you are up against it when it
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning inflates. Always sit back against the
seatback and as far away as practical
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message appears from the steering wheel. Always use the
in the vehicle information display when the fuel- seat belts.
filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle
has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for
the message to be displayed. To turn off the warn-
ing message, perform the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon
as possible. For additional information, refer
to “Fuel-filler cap” in this section.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a single click
is heard.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33


SUN VISORS


1 To block glare from the front, swing down the
sun visor.

2 To block glare from the side, remove the sun
visor from the center mount and swing the
visor to the side.

3 To extend the sun visor, slide in or out as
needed.

CAUTION
● Do not store the sun visor before return-
ing the extension to its original
position.
LPD2123 ● Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.
MANUAL OPERATION
Tilt and telescopic operation
Pull the lock lever 䊊
1 down:

● Adjust the steering wheel up or down in


direction 䊊
2 to the desired position.

● Adjust the steering wheel forward or back-


ward in direction 䊊
3 to the desired position.

Push the lock lever 䊊 1 up firmly to lock the


steering wheel in place.

WPD0344

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


MIRRORS

LPD2067 LPD2120 WPD0126


VANITY MIRRORS CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only) REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor To access the card holder, slide card in the card Use the night position 䊊 1 to reduce glare from
down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity holder. Do not view information while operating the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is the vehicle.
Use the day position 䊊
2 when driving in daylight
open.
hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35


● To turn on the anti-glare feature, press
the button again. The indicator light
will turn on.
Type B (if so equipped):
● To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,
press the O button. The indicator light
will turn off.
● To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature
again, press the | button again. The in-
dicator light will turn on.
For additional information, refer to the
“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (if so
WPD0446 LPD0469 equipped)” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-
Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) tion of this manual.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE NOTE:


REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) Do not hang any objects over the sensors
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati- 䊊
1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
cally dims during night time conditions and ac-
sensors, resulting in improper operation.
cording to the intensity of the headlights of the
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare The indicator light 䊊2 will illuminate when the
feature is activated when the ignition switch is in automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
the ON position.
Type A (if so equipped):
● To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
the button. The indicator light will turn
off.

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.

LPD2083 LPD2084

OUTSIDE MIRRORS Manual folding outside mirrors


The outside mirror remote control will operate Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
Move the small switch 䊊 1 to select the left or right
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position tional information, refer to “Rear window and
using the large switch 䊊 2 .
outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37


MEMO

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems

Control panel buttons — color screen with Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Around View® Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-24
How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) . . . . 4-27
How to use the [ ] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 MOD system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Turning MOD on and off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
How to use the POWER button/VOLUME MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
How to use the CAMERA button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Heater and Air Conditioner (manual)
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Difference between predicted and actual Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Heater and Air Conditioner (automatic)
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Around View® Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Difference between predicted and actual Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
How to park with predicted course lines. . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-75
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Registering with NissanConnectSM Mobile
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) Connect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
player (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 Application Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
player (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port Siri® Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
(models without Navigation System) Operating Siri® Eyes Free. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
(models with Navigation System) Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
iPod®* player operation without Navigation Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
iPod®* player operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Bluetooth® streaming audio without Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Text messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 NISSAN Voice Recognition System
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94 System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
Connecting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94 voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103
Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95 Navigation System voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95 Audio system voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95 Information voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95 My Apps Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95 Help voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104
Text messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-105
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air condi-
tioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in or-
der that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from it,
stop using the system immediately and
contact a NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such
conditions may lead to accidents, fire or
electrical shock.
LHA2900
1. MAP button* 5. (brightness control) button
2. Display screen 6. BACK button
3. button** 7. ENTER / AUDIO button / TUNE / SCROLL
knob
4. button
8. POWER button / VOLUME control knob
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
9. CAMERA button HOW TO USE THE TOUCH- WARNING
10. NAV button* SCREEN ● ALWAYS give your full attention to
* For additional information, refer to the separate driving.
CAUTION
Navigation System Owner’s Manual regarding ● Avoid using vehicle features that could
the Navigation system control buttons . ● The glass display screen may break if it distract you. If distracted, you could
is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the lose control of your vehicle and cause
** For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® glass screen breaks, do not touch it. an accident.
Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys- Doing so could result in an injury.
tem” in this section regarding the Bluetooth®
● To clean the display, never use a rough
Hands-Free Phone System control button.
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
When you use this system, make sure the engine kind of solvent or paper towel with a
is running. chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long ● Do not splash any liquid such as water
time, it will discharge the battery, and the or car fragrance on the display. Contact
engine will not start. with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.
Reference symbols:
To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a not be operated while driving.
key shown only on the display. These keys can be
selected by touching the screen. The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-
ate the navigation system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5


LHA3748
Touch-screen operation
Menu Item Result
Selecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.
Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page. Touch the down
arrow to scroll down the page.
Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.
Space Inserts a space.
Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the characters.
OK Completes the character input.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-
tergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the
screen.
HOW TO USE THE BACK
BUTTON
Press the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.

LHA3747 LHA3748

HOW TO USE THE [ ] BUTTON To select and/or adjust several functions, fea-
tures and modes that are available for your ve-
For additional information, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual regarding hicle:
the “SiriusXM® Travel Link”, and “Traffic” fea- 1. Press the [ ] button.
tures.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
For additional information, refer to “NissanCon-
nectSM Mobile Apps” in this section regarding 3. Touch the desired item.
“My Apps” key.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition System” in this section re-
garding the “Voice Commands” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7


Menu item Result
Audio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Phone & Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.
Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.
Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.
Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are suited for the respec-
tive times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.
Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.
Clock Touch this key to adjust the time.
Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
Date Format Select from five possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year.
Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to set the clock
using the “Set Clock Manually” key.
Set Clock Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. “Clock Mode” must
Manually be set to manual for this option to be available.
Daylight Sav- Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.
ings Time
Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.
Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.
Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).
Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness.
Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast.
Color Adjust touch-screen color.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


Menu item Result
Temperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).
Touchscreen click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the screen is touched.
System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message appears on the
screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.
Return to Factory Settings/ Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
Clear Memory
Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Traffic messages Touch this key to display traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
SXM Touch this key to start SiriusXM® radio. For additional information, refer to “Audio system” regarding SXM setup in this section.

BUTTON HOW TO USE THE CAMERA


To change the display brightness, press BUTTON
the button. Pressing the button again will For additional information, refer to “REARVIEW
change the display to the day or the night display. MONITOR” regarding the CAMERA button in this
Press and hold the button for more than section.
2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the button
again to turn the display on.
HOW TO USE THE POWER
BUTTON/VOLUME CONTROL KNOB
Press the POWER button to turn audio function
on and off. Turn the VOLUME control knob to
adjust audio volume.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9


REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)

LHA3749

WARNING ● RearView Monitor is a convenience fea- ● The system is designed as an aid to the
ture and is not a substitute for proper driver in showing large stationary ob-
● Failure to follow the warnings and in-
backing. Always turn and look out the jects directly behind the vehicle, to help
structions for proper use of the Rear-
windows and check mirrors to be sure avoid damaging the vehicle.
View Monitor system could result in se- that it is safe to move before operating
rious injury or death. the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


● The distance guide line and the vehicle
width line should be used as a reference
only when the vehicle is on a level
paved surface. The distance viewed on
the monitor is for reference only and
may be different than the actual dis-
tance between the vehicle and dis-
played objects.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the
camera.
LHA3694 LHA2944
The RearView Monitor system automatically
shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. The system uses a camera located just above the
vehicle’s license plate 䊊
1 .
LINES
radio can still be heard while the RearView Moni-
tor is active. Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM and distances to objects with reference to the
OPERATION vehicle body line 䊊
A are displayed on the monitor.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move Distance guide lines
the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press
the CAMERA button to operate the RearView Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
Monitor.
● Red line 䊊
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

● Yellow line 䊊
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)

● Green line 䊊
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

● Green line 䊊
4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11


Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
5

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.


DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on
the ground are for approximate reference only.
Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or project-
ing objects will be actually located at distances
different from those displayed in the monitor rela-
tive to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you
are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to
view the positioning of objects behind the ve-
hicle.

LHA3695 LHA3696

Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill


When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis- When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance. lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
Note that any object on the hill is further than it Note that any object on the hill is closer than it
appears on the monitor. appears on the monitor.
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
the position 䊊A if the object projects over the
actual backing up course.

LHA2946 LHA3697
Backing up near a projecting object Backing up behind a projecting object
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object in The position 䊊 C is shown farther than the position
the display. However, the vehicle may hit the 䊊B in the display. However, the position 䊊 C is
object if it projects over the actual backing up actually at the same distance as the position 䊊 A.
course. The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13


NOTE: ● Objects in the RearView Monitor will
Do not adjust any of the display settings of appear visually opposite compared to
the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is when viewed in the rearview and out-
moving. Make sure the parking brake is side mirrors.
firmly applied. ● Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle
LIMITATIONS position, road conditions and road
grade.
WARNING ● Make sure that the trunk is securely
Listed below are the system limitations for closed when backing up.
RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the
● Do not put anything on the rearview
vehicle in accordance with these system
LHA3639 camera. The rearview camera is in-
limitations could result in serious injury or
stalled above the license plate.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN death.
● When washing the vehicle with high
● The system cannot completely elimi-
1. Firmly apply your foot to the brake and put pressure water, be sure not to spray it
nate blind spots and may not show ev-
the vehicle into R (reverse). around the camera. Otherwise, water
ery object.
may enter the camera unit causing wa-
2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button. ● Underneath the bumper and the corner ter condensation on the lens, a mal-
3. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight areas of the bumper cannot be viewed function, fire or an electric shock.
on the RearView Monitor because of its
the “Brightness” or “Contrast” option. ● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
monitoring range limitation. The system
4. Press the ENTER/SETTING button. sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-
will not show small objects below the
function or cause damage resulting in a
5. Adjust the level using the TUNE/SCROLL bumper, and may not show objects
fire or an electric shock.
close to the bumper or on the ground.
knob and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to apply the adjustment. ● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
tor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used.

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


The following are operating limitations and do not ● Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off
represent a system malfunction: any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a
● When the temperature is extremely high or dry cloth.
low, the screen may not clearly display ob-
jects.
● When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper.
● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
LHA3694
light.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
● The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-
tor may differ somewhat from the actual CAUTION
color of objects.
● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a to clean the camera. This will cause
dark environment. discoloration.
● There may be a delay when switching be- ● Do not damage the camera as the moni-
tween views. tor screen may be adversely affected.
● If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the cam- If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera
era, RearView Monitor may not display ob- 䊊
1 , the RearView Monitor may not display ob-
jects clearly. Clean the camera. jects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a
cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15


AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so
equipped)

LHA3699
1. CAMERA button

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


The Around View® Monitor system is designed
WARNING
as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot
● Failure to follow the warnings and in- parking or parallel parking.
structions for the proper use of the
Around View® Monitor system could The monitor displays various views of the position
result in serious injury or death. of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all
views are available at all times.
● The Around View® Monitor is a conve-
nience feature and is not a substitute Available views:
for proper vehicle operation because it ● Front View
has areas where objects cannot be An approximately 150–degree view of the
viewed. The four corners of the vehicle front of the vehicle.
in particular, are areas where objects do
not always appear in the bird’s-eye, ● Rear View
front, or rear views. Always check your An approximately 150–degree view of the
surroundings to be sure that it is safe to rear of the vehicle. LHA3700
move before operating the vehicle. Al- ● Bird’s-Eye View To display the multiple views, the Around View®
ways operate the vehicle slowly. The surrounding views of the vehicle from Monitor system uses cameras located in the front
● The driver is always responsible for above. grille, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one
safety during parking and other just above the vehicle’s license plate 䊊
1 .
● Front-Side View
maneuvers. The view around and ahead of the front AROUND VIEW® MONITOR
passenger’s side wheel. SYSTEM OPERATION
CAUTION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move
Do not scratch the camera lens when the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the the CAMERA button to operate the Around
camera. View® Monitor.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17


The screen displayed on the Around View® ● When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-
Monitor will automatically return to the previous jects viewed in the monitor are further
screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has than they appear. When driving the ve-
been pressed with the shift lever in a position hicle down a hill, objects viewed in the
other than the R (Reverse) position. monitor are closer than they appear.
Available views ● Objects in the rear view will appear vi-
sually opposite compared to when
WARNING viewed in the monitor and outside
mirrors.
● The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width lines should be used as a refer- ● Use the mirrors or actually look to prop-
ence only when the vehicle is on a erly judge distances to other objects.
paved, level surface. The apparent dis- ● On a snow-covered or slippery road,
tance viewed on the monitor may be there may be a difference between the SAA1840
different than the actual distance be- predicted course lines and the actual
tween the vehicle and displayed Front view
course line.
objects. Front and rear view
● The vehicle width and predicted course
● Use the displayed lines and the bird’s- lines are wider than the actual width Guiding lines that indicate the approximate ve-
eye view as a reference. The lines and and course. hicle width and distance to objects with refer-
the bird’s-eye view are greatly affected ence to the vehicle body line 䊊
A are displayed on
by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel ● The displayed lines will appear slightly
the monitor.
level, vehicle position, road condition off to the right, because the rearview
and road grade. camera is not installed in the rear center Distance guide lines:
of the vehicle.
● If the tires are replaced with different Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
sized tires, the predicted course lines ● Red line 䊊
1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-
played incorrectly. ● Yellow line 䊊
2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m)

● Green line 䊊
3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)

● Green line 䊊
4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m)

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


The front view will not be displayed when the
vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front view
and the steering wheel turns about 90 de-
grees or less from the straight-ahead posi-
tion, both the right and left predicted
course lines 䊊 6 are displayed. When the
steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or
more, a line is displayed only on the oppo-
site side of the turn.

SAA1896 LHA3802
Rear view Bird’s-eye view
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
5 :
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of
Indicate the approximate vehicle width when the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle po-
backing up. sition and the predicted course to a parking
space.
Predicted course lines 䊊
6 :
The vehicle icon 䊊 1 shows the position of the
Indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between
vehicle. The predicted course lines will be dis- objects viewed in the bird’s-eye view may differ
played on the monitor when the steering wheel is somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.
turned. The predicted course lines will move de-
The areas that the cameras cannot cover 䊊
2 are
pending on how much the steering wheel is
indicated in black.
turned and will not be displayed while the steer-
ing wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19


The non-viewable area 䊊 2 is highlighted in yellow DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
for several seconds after the bird’s-eye view is PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
displayed. It will be shown only the first time after
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on
WARNING the ground are for approximate reference only.
● Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap- Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or project-
pear further than the actual distance. ing objects will be actually located at distances
different from those displayed in the monitor rela-
● Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, tive to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
may be misaligned or not displayed at in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you
the seam of the views. are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to
● Objects that are above the camera can- view the positioning of objects behind the ve-
not be displayed. hicle.
LHA2652
● The view of the bird’s-eye view may be
Front-side view
misaligned when the camera position
alters. Guiding lines
● A line on the ground may be misaligned Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width
and is not seen as being straight at the and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on
seam of the views. The misalignment the monitor.
will increase as the line proceeds away
from the vehicle. The front-of-vehicle line 䊊
1 shows the front part
of the vehicle.
● Tire angle display does not indicate the
actual tire angle. The side-of-vehicle line 䊊2 shows the approxi-
mate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.
The extensions 䊊3 of both the front 䊊
1 and side
䊊2 lines are shown with a green dotted line.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


LHA3695 LHA3696 LHA1201

Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting object
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis- When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the The predicted course lines 䊊 A do not touch the
tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit
lines are shown closer than the actual distance. lines are shown farther than the actual distance. the object if it projects over the actual backing up
Note that any object on the hill is further than it Note that any object on the hill is closer than it course.
appears on the monitor. appears on the monitor.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
the position 䊊A if the object projects over the
actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
● If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
● On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predicted course line and the actual
course line.
● If the battery is disconnected or be-
comes discharged, the predicted course
lines may be displayed incorrectly. If
this occurs, please perform the follow-
ing procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock to
lock while the engine is running.
LHA3697 – Drive the vehicle on a straight road LHA1197

Backing up behind a projecting object for more than 5 minutes. 1. Visually check that the parking space is safe
● When the steering wheel is turned with before parking your vehicle.
The position 䊊 C is shown farther than the position
䊊B in the display. However, the position 䊊 C is the ignition switch in the ACC position,
the predicted course lines may be dis-
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on
the screen 䊊
actually at the same distance as the position 䊊
A when the shift lever is moved
A.
played incorrectly. to the R (Reverse) position.
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position, the
vehicle width guide lines 䊊D parallel to the only available view is front view/front-side view
parking space 䊊 C while referring to the pre- split screen.
dicted course lines. The display will switch from the Around View®
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space Monitor screen when:
completely, move the shift lever to the P ● The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and
(Park) position and apply the parking brake. the vehicle speed increases above approxi-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h)
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
● A different screen is selected.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the
R (Reverse) position to operate the Around
View® Monitor.
The Around View® Monitor displays different
split screen views depending on the position of
the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to
switch between the available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the
available views are:
● Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
LHA1198
● Rear view/front-side view split screen
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predicted course If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the
lines 䊊
B enter the parking space 䊊 C. available views are:
● Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
● Front view/front-side view split screen

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23


NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings of
the Around View® Monitor while the ve-
hicle is moving. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied.

LHA3679

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN


1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift
lever in R (reverse).
2. Press the button on the control panel.
3. The screen will display the Night settings.
4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up LHA3750
or down. AROUND VIEW® MONITOR
5. Press the button again to access the SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
Auto settings.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


There are some areas where the system will not ● There may be differences in sharpness be-
WARNING
show objects and the system does not warn of tween each camera view of the bird’s-eye
Listed below are the system limitations for moving objects. When in the front or rear view view.
Around View® Monitor. Failure to operate display, an object below the bumper or on the ● Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off
the vehicle in accordance with these sys- ground may not be viewed 䊊 1 . When in the
any wax with a clean cloth that has been
tem limitations could result in serious in- bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam 䊊
2 of
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
jury or death. the camera viewing areas will not appear in the agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
● Do not use the Around View® Monitor monitor.
with the outside mirrors in the stored
The following are operating limitations and do not
position, and make sure that the trunk is
securely closed when operating the ve- represent a system malfunction:
hicle using the Around View® Monitor. ● There may be a delay when switching be-
● The apparent distance between objects tween views.
viewed on the Around View® Monitor
● When the temperature is extremely high or
differs from the actual distance.
low, the screen may not display objects
● The cameras are installed on the front clearly.
grille, the outside mirrors and above the
rear license plate. Do not put anything ● When strong light directly shines on the
on the vehicle that covers the cameras. camera, objects may not be displayed
● When washing the vehicle with high clearly.
pressure water, be sure not to spray it ● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
around the cameras. Otherwise, water light.
may enter the camera unit causing wa-
ter condensation on the lens, a mal- ● The colors of objects on the Around View®
function, fire or an electric shock. Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual
color of objects.
● Do not strike the cameras. They are
precision instruments. Doing so could ● Objects on the Around View® Monitor may
cause a malfunction or cause damage not be clear and the color of the object may
resulting in a fire or an electric shock. differ in a dark environment.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25


LHA3801 LHA3592 LHA3700
System temporarily unavailable When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the screen, SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
the camera image may be receiving temporary
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen, electronic disturbances from surrounding de-
there are abnormal conditions in the Around CAUTION
vices. This will not hinder normal driving opera-
View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving tion but the system should be inspected by a ● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
operation but the system should be inspected by NISSAN dealer if it occurs frequently. to clean the camera. This will cause
a NISSAN dealer. discoloration.
● Do not damage the cameras as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the
cameras 䊊 1 , the Around View® Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wip-
ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)
(if so equipped)

LHA3699
1. CAMERA button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27


WARNING MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
● Failure to follow the warnings and in- The MOD system will turn on automatically under
structions for proper use of the Moving the following conditions:
Object Detection (MOD) system could ● When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
result in serious injury or death. position.
● The MOD system is not a substitute for ● When the CAMERA button is pressed to
proper vehicle operation and is not de- activate the camera view on the display.
signed to prevent contact with objects
surrounding the vehicle. When maneu- ● When vehicle speed decreases below ap-
vering, always use the outside mirrors proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and the camera
and rearview mirror and turn and check screen is displayed.
the surroundings to ensure it is safe to
maneuver.
LHA3593
● The system is deactivated at speeds Front and bird’s-eye views
above 5 mph (8 km/h). It is reactivated
at lower speeds. The MOD system operates in the following con-
ditions when the camera view is displayed:
● The MOD system is not designed to
detect surrounding stationary objects. ● When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped,
The MOD system can inform the driver of moving the MOD system detects moving objects in
objects near the vehicle when backing out of the bird’s-eye view. The MOD system will
garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other not operate if the outside mirrors are moving
such instances.
in or out, in the stowed position, or if either
The MOD system detects moving objects by front door is opened.
using image processing technology on the image
shown in the display. ● When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi-
tion and the vehicle speed is below approxi-
mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD system
detects moving objects in the front view.
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
TURNING MOD ON AND OFF
To turn the MOD system on or off:
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Using the buttons, select “Driver As-
sistance” and press the ENTER button.
3. Select “Parking Aids”.
4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” using
the ENTER button.
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
LHA3594 LHA3595
Rear and bird’s-eye views Rear and front-side views WARNING
● When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) While the MOD system continues to detect mov- Listed below are the system limitations for
position and the vehicle speed is below ap- ing objects, the yellow frame continues to be MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD sys- displayed. accordance with these system limitations
tem detects moving objects in the rear view.
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊
1 is could result in serious injury or death.
The MOD system will not operate if the trunk
is open.
displayed on each camera image (front, rear, ● Do not use the MOD system when tow-
right, left) depending on where moving objects ing a trailer. The system may not func-
The MOD system does not detect moving ob- are detected. tion properly.
jects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not
The yellow frame is displayed on each view in the ● Excessive noise (for example, audio
displayed on the screen when in this view. front view and rear view modes. system volume or open vehicle window)
will interfere with the chime sound, and
When the MOD system detects moving objects A blue MOD icon 䊊 2 is displayed in the view
near the vehicle, a yellow frame will be displayed it may not be heard.
where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD
on the view where the objects are detected. icon is displayed in the view where the MOD
system is not operative.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
● The MOD system performance will be ● If your vehicle sustains damage to the
limited according to environmental con- parts where the camera is installed,
ditions and surrounding objects such leaving it misaligned or bent, the sens-
as: ing zone may be altered and the MOD
system may not detect objects properly.
– When there is low contrast between
background and the moving objects. ● When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not display
– When there is a blinking source of
objects clearly. This is not a
light.
malfunction.
– When strong light such as another
vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is
present.
– When camera orientation is not in its
usual position, such as when a mirror LHA3700
is folded. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
– When there is dirt, water drops or
snow on the camera lens. CAUTION
– When the position of the moving ob- ● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
jects in the display is not changed. to clean the camera. This will cause
● The MOD system might detect flowing discoloration.
water droplets on the camera lens, ● Do not damage the camera as the moni-
white smoke from the muffler, moving tor screen may be adversely affected.
shadows, etc. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the
● The MOD system may not function cameras 䊊 1 , the MOD system may not operate
properly depending on the speed, direc- properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth
tion, distance or shape of the moving dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and
objects. then wiping with a dry cloth.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


VENTS

LHA2925 LHA2926 LHA1134


Side Center Rear
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.
Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move
the dial toward the to open the vents or
toward the to close them.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31


HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)

WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who would
normally require the assistance of others
alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not
be left alone. They could accidentally in-
jure themselves or others through inad-
vertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on
hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people or animals.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.

NOTE:
● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor
LHA2243
can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.
1. Fan speed control / system OFF dial / 5. Rear window and outside mirror (if so
air conditioning (A/C) button equipped) defroster switch ● When parking, set the heater and air condi-
tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
2. Air flow control buttons 6. Front windshield defrost button allow fresh air into the passenger compart-
ment. This should help reduce odors inside
3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C button
the vehicle.
4. Air recirculation button
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CONTROLS Air recirculation button Rear window and outside mirror (if so
Fan control dial equipped) defroster switch
On position (Indicator light on):
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, For additional information, refer to “Rear window
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
and controls fan speed. and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster
Press the button to the ON position when: switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section
Air flow control buttons of this manual.
● driving on a dusty road.
The air flow control buttons allow you to select HEATER OPERATION
the air flow outlets. ● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-
MAX — Air flows mainly from center and senger compartment. Heating
A/C side vents with maximum cooling ● for maximum cooling when using the air con- This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
and turns on. ditioner. outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
— Air flows mainly from center and Off position (Indicator light off): outlets and the side vent outlets.
side vents. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart- 1. Press the button to change to fresh
— Air flows mainly from center and ment and distributed through the selected outlet.
air intake mode. The indicator light
side vents and foot outlets. Use the off position for normal heater or air con- will turn off for normal heating.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets ditioner operation.
2. Press the air flow control button.
and partly from defroster.
— Air flows mainly from defroster Air conditioner button 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
outlets and foot outlets. tion.
— Air flows mainly from defroster Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
outlets. the desired position and press the button sired position between the middle and the
to turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air hot position.
Temperature control dial conditioner, press the button again.
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
ates only when the engine is running.
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33


Ventilation ● When the position is selected, the air 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
This mode directs outside air to the side and conditioner automatically turns on if the out- tion.
center vents. side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog sired position between the middle and the
1. Press the button to change to fresh the windshield. The indicator auto- hot position.
air intake mode. The indicator light matically turns off, allowing outside air to be
will turn off. drawn into the passenger compartment to ● When the position is selected, the air
further improve the defogging performance. conditioner automatically turns on if the out-
2. Press the air flow control button. side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
The recirculation mode cannot be activated
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- in the position. This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
tion. the windshield. The indicator auto-
Bi-level heating matically turns off, allowing outside air to be
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side drawn into the passenger compartment to
sired position.
and center vents and to the front and rear floor further improve the defogging performance.
Defrosting or defogging outlets.
Operating tips
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to 1. Press the button to change to fresh Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
defrost/defog the windows.
air intake mode. The will turn off. and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
1. Press the defroster button . improves heater operation.
2. Press the air flow control button.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
tion.
tion. Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- the desired position, and press the button
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the to activate the air conditioner. When the air con-
sired position.
hot position. ditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying func-
● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-
Heating and defogging tions are added to the heater operation.
dows, turn the fan control dial to the highest This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind- The air conditioner cooling function oper-
setting and the temperature control to the shield. ates only when the engine is running.
full HOT position. 1. Press the air flow control button.
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Cooling 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- ● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 min-
sired position. utes with the windows open to vent hot air
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. from the passenger compartment. Then,
Dehumidified defogging close the windows. This allows the air con-
1. Press the air flow control button.
This mode is used to defog the windows and ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- dehumidify the air.
● The air conditioning system should be
tion. operated for approximately 10 minutes
1. Press the air flow control button.
3. Press the button. at least once a month. This helps pre-
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- vent damage to the system due to lack
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- tion. of lubrication.
sired position.
● When the or are selected, the ● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
● For quick cooling, press the MAX A/C but- air conditioner automatically turns on if the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
ton. When the MAX A/C button is pressed, it outside temperature is more than 36°F is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
will activate the mode. The amount of (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps malfunction.
air coming through the vents is the highest it defog the windshield. The mode au- ● If the engine coolant temperature
can go when in MAX A/C mode regardless tomatically turns off, allowing outside air to gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
of the position of the FAN dial. be drawn into the passenger compartment perature over the normal range, turn
to further improve the defogging perfor- the air conditioner off. For additional
Dehumidified heating mance. information, refer to “If your vehicle
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air. overheats” in the “In case of emer-
● The air conditioner is always on in gency” section of this manual.
1. Press the button to the OFF position. or mode, regardless of whether the
● If the engine coolant temperature becomes
2. Press the air flow control button. indicator light is on or off.
too high, will be activated and the
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- indicator light will come on automatically.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired
sired position.
position. ● When the ignition is OFF, button characters
4. Press the A/C button. The indicator light
Operating tips will not illuminate.
comes on. ● Keep the windows and moonroof closed
while the air conditioner is in operation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation in-
dicator should always be in the OFF posi-
tion for heating and defrosting.

LHA3706

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


LHA3707 LHA3708

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37


LHA3709 LHA3710

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)

8. Fresh air intake button


9. AUTO (automatic mode) button
10. (fan speed control) buttons
11. Air recirculation button
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
LHA2875 air to become stale and the windows to
1. 6. Temperature control dial (passenger’s fog up.
(front defroster) button
2. Temperature control dial (driver’s side) / side)/DUAL (passenger’s side tempera-
ON-OFF button ture control) button
3. MODE (manual air flow control) button 7. (rear window and outside mirror
4. Display screen (if so equipped) defroster) switch
5. A/C (air conditioner) button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
NOTE: ● A visible mist may be seen coming from the Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal- 1. Press the front defroster button on.
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor function. The indicator light on the button will come
can enter the passenger compartment on.
through the vents. 3. You can individually set driver’s and front
passenger’s side temperature using each 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
● When parking, set the heater and air condi- temperature control dial. When the DUAL maximum temperature to aid in defrosting or
tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to button or passenger’s side temperature dial defogging.
allow fresh air into the passenger compart- is turned, the DUAL indicator will come on. ● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
ment. This should help reduce odors inside To turn off the passenger’s side temperature windows, use the fan speed control dial to
the vehicle. control, press the DUAL button. set the fan speed to maximum.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION Heating (A/C OFF) ● As soon as possible after the windshield is
The air conditioner does not activate. When you clean, press the AUTO button to return to
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating the automatic mode.
need to heat only, use this mode.
(AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the 1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator light ● When the front defroster button is
comes on. pressed, the air conditioner will automati-
system automatically works to keep a constant
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the cally be turned on at outside temperatures
temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed
desired temperature. above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode
are also controlled automatically.
automatically turns off, allowing outside air
1. Press the AUTO button on. The indicator on ● The temperature of the passenger compart- to be drawn into the passenger compart-
the button will illuminate. ment will be maintained automatically. Air ment to further improve the defogging per-
flow distribution and fan speed are also con- formance. When the air recirculate mode
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left trolled automatically. automatically turns off, the air fresh mode will
or right to set the desired temperature. automatically turn on.
● Do not set the temperature lower than the
● The temperature of the passenger compart- outside air temperature. Otherwise, the sys-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air tem may not work properly.
flow distribution and fan speed are also con- ● Not recommended if windows fog up.
trolled automatically.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


MANUAL OPERATION — Air flows mainly from defroster
Fan speed control and foot outlets.
Press the fan control buttons to manually To turn system off
control the fan speed. Press the ON-OFF button.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.
Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch
Air recirculation
For additional information, refer to “Rear window
Press the air recirculation button to recir- and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster
culate interior air inside the vehicle. The switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section
indicator light on the button will come on. of this manual.
The air recirculation cannot be activated when OPERATING TIPS
the air conditioner is in the front defrosting LHA2949
● When the engine coolant temperature and
mode. outside air temperature are low, the air flow The sunload sensor, located on the top and cen-
from the foot outlets may not operate for a ter of the instrument panel, helps the system
Fresh air intake maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
Press the fresh air intake button to draw not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera- thing on or around this sensor.
outside air into the passenger compartment. ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.
Air flow control
Pressing the MODE button manually controls air ● Keep the moonroof closed while the air con-
flow and selects the air outlet: ditioner is in operation.
— Air flows mainly from center and ● If you feel that the air flow mode you have
side vents. selected and the outlets the air is coming out
— Air flows mainly from center and do not match, select the mode.
side vents and foot outlets. ● When you change the air flow mode, you
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets may feel air flow from the feet vents for just a
and partly from defroster. moment. This is not a malfunction.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve- RADIO Reception conditions will constantly change be-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
the environment in mind. With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi- signal distance and interference from other ve-
tion, press the or POWER hicles can work against ideal reception. De-
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
button/VOLUME control knob to turn the radio scribed below are some of the factors that can
ozone layer.
on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not affect your radio reception.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re- running, the ignition should be placed in the ACC Some cellular phones or other devices may
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi- position. cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants Radio reception is affected by station signal from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-
system. For additional information, refer to “Air ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- nate the noise.
conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommen-
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
dations” in the “Technical and consumer informa- FM RADIO RECEPTION
normally are caused by these external influences.
tion” section of this manual.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ- (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
mentally friendly” air conditioning system. may influence radio reception quality.
having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-
Radio reception nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM
WARNING station reception even if the FM station is within
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
The air conditioner system contains refrig-
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra- directly related to the distance between the
erant under high pressure. To avoid per-
dio reception. These circuits are designed to transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-
sonal injury, any air conditioner service
should be done only by an experienced extend reception range, and to enhance the qual- of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-
technician with proper equipment. ity of that reception. acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
off objects.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
when the finest equipment is used. These char- and/or drift.
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Static and flutter: During signal interference from SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position equipped)
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can When the satellite radio is used for the first time
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
treble control to reduce treble response. radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected large building for satellite radio to receive all of
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The the necessary data.
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
mentary flutter or loss of sound. No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
AM RADIO RECEPTION selected unless optional satellite receiver and
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite
bend around objects and skip along the ground. Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of Satellite radio performance may be affected if
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub- cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter signal.
to receiver.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing antenna.
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can LHA0099
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43


Compact disc (CD) player ● Do not expose the CD to direct sun- CHECK DISC
light.
● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
CAUTION ● CDs that are in poor condition or are rectly (the label side is facing up,
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD dirty, scratched or covered with finger- etc.).
insert slot. This could damage the CD prints may not work properly.
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or
and/or CD player. ● The following CDs may not work prop- warped and it is free of scratches.
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door erly:
closed could damage the CD and/or CD PRESS EJECT
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
player. This is an error due to excessive tem-
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD perature inside the player. Remove the
player at a time. ● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) ● Do not use the following CDs as they
can be played when the temperature of
round discs that have the “COMPACT may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion: the player returns to normal.
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging. ● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter UNPLAYABLE

● During cold weather or rainy days, the ● CDs that are not round The file is unplayable in this audio sys-
player may malfunction due to the hu- tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)
● CDs with a paper label CD).
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player ● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
completely. have abnormal edges
● The player may skip while driving on ● This audio system can only play pre-
rough roads. recorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
● The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the compartment tempera- ● If the CD cannot be played, one of the
ture is extremely high or low. following messages will be displayed.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Compact disc with MP3 or WMA ● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
Terms are converted from analog to digital (A/D
● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures conversion) per second.
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the ● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
most well-known compressed digital audio methods for writing data to media. Writing
file format. This format allows for near “CD data once to the media is called a single
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of session, and writing more than once is called
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an a multisession.
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the ● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 contains information about the digital music
compression removes the redundant and file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-
human ear doesn’t hear. mation is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Micro- * Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA tered trademarks and trademarks in the United
codec offers greater file compression than States of America and other countries of Micro-
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more soft Corporation of the USA.
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same WHA1078
level of quality. Playback order chart
● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of Playback order
bits per second used by a digital music file. Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
The size and quality of a compressed digital files is as illustrated.
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file. ● The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.
Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW


Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Supported Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
versions*1 WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),
Displayable character codes*2
05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure


Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
before the music starts
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
Music cuts off or skips
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
files
Moves immediately to the When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there
next song when playing will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
the desired order

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47


USB (Universal Serial Bus) The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. Notes for iPod® use
Connection Port USB devices should be purchased separately as
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
necessary.
the U.S. and other countries.
WARNING This system cannot be used to format USB de-
● Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause
vices. To format a USB device, use a personal
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the a checkmark to be displayed on and off
computer.
USB device while driving. Doing so can be (flickering). Always make sure that the
a distraction. If distracted you could lose In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front iPod® is connected properly.
control of your vehicle and cause an acci- seats plays only sound without images for regu-
dent or serious injury. ● An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain
latory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is con-
This system supports various USB memory de- nected during a seek operation. In this case,
CAUTION vices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some please manually reset the iPod®.
● Do not force the USB device into the USB devices may not be supported by this sys-
● An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-
USB port. Inserting the USB device tem.
tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is discon-
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
● Partitioned USB devices may not play cor- nected during a seek operation.
damage the port. Make sure that the
rectly.
USB device is connected correctly into ● An incorrect song title may appear when the
the USB port. ● Some characters used in other languages Play Mode is changed while using an iPod®
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear nano (2nd Generation).
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
properly in the display. Using English lan-
equipped) when pulling the USB device ● Audiobooks may not play in the same order
guage characters with a USB device is rec-
out of the port. This could damage the as they appear on an iPod®.
ommended.
port and the cover.
● Large video files cause slow responses in an
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place General notes for USB use
iPod®. The vehicle center display may mo-
where it can be pulled unintentionally. ● Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner mentarily black out, but will soon recover.
Pulling the cable may damage the port. information regarding the proper use and
● If an iPod® automatically selects large video
care of the device.
files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle
center display may momentarily black out,
but will soon recover.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so ● While an audio device is connected through
equipped) the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the device may discharge
● Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be quicker than usual.
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system. ● This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio
● It is necessary to set up the wireless con- Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
nection between a compatible Bluetooth®
audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth® BLUETOOTH® is a
module before using the Bluetooth® audio. trademark owned by
● Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® au- Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
dio will vary depending on the devices. Make and licensed to
sure how to operate your audio device be- Visteon and Bosch.
fore using it with this system.
● The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped un-
der the following conditions:
● Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
● Checking the connection to the hands-
free phone.
● Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in
an area surrounded by metal or far away from
the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent
tone quality degradation and wireless con-
nection disruption.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49


7. CAT button
8. BACK button
9. APPS button
10. ENTER/SETTING button/ TUNE/SCROLL
knob
11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
12. RDM (random) button
13. RPT (repeat) button
14. (power) button/ VOL (volume) control
knob
15. DISP (display) button
16. MEDIA button
17. FM•AM button
*No satellite radio reception is available when the
XM button is pressed to access satellite radio
stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-
tenna are installed and an SiriusXM® Satellite
LHA2845
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH 3. Display screen dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type 4. CD insert slot For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-
A) (if so equipped) tion precautions” regarding all operation precau-
5. SEEK button
1. CD eject button tions in this section.
6. SCAN button
2. XM button*
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Audio main operation To turn the system off, press the (power) ENTER/SETTING button
button. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show the
(power) button / VOL (volume) con-
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the Settings screen on the display. Turn the
trol knob
volume. TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen- and then press the ENTER button to make a
position and press the (power) button
sitive Volume. When this feature is active, the selection.
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio,
CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that audio volume changes as the driving speed
was playing immediately before the system was changes.
turned off.
Audio
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of
the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume in-
creases in relation to vehicle speed.
AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides
no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Clock adjust Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.
On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Language Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the item
to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button until the display returns to
the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
APPS button XM band select SEEK tuning
Press the APPS button to launch the Smart- Press the XM button to change the band as
phone Integration Mode. For additional informa- follows: Press the or SEEK buttons to tune
tion, refer to “NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps” in from low to high or high to low frequencies and to
this section regarding this feature. XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so
stop at the next broadcasting station.
equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® SCAN tuning
Hands-Free Phone system without Navigation” in When the XM button is pressed while the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
this section regarding connecting your phone.
come on at the station last played. casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear
FM/AM/SAT radio operation on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.
The last station played will also come on when
FM·AM button Pressing the button again during this 5 second
the VOL (volume)/ (power) control
period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as knob/button is pressed on.
remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is
follows: *When the XM button is pressed, the satellite not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM radio reception will not be available unless an moves to the next station.
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
If another audio source is playing when the stalled and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service 1 to 6 Station memory operations
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play- subscription is active. Satellite radio is not avail-
ing will automatically be turned off and the last Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
able in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1,
radio station played will begin playing.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM button six for FM2).
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the 1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
turned off and the last radio station played will using the FM·AM select button.
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-
come on.
matically changes from stereo to monaural re-
ception. 2. Tune to the desired station using the
TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)
SEEK button or the TRACK button.
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right Press and hold any of the desired station
for manual tuning. memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset
number is updated on the display and a
beep is heard.
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
3. Programming is now complete. SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man- Fast Forward) button If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-
ner. ing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change
Press and hold the or folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse SEEK/TRACK button for 1.5 seconds while the folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward folder.
case, reset the desired stations. the track being played. The compact disc plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast for- RPT (repeat) button
Compact disc (CD) player operation warding. When the button is released, the com-
When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed while a
pact disc returns to normal play speed.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
turns off and the compact disc begins to play. SEEK/TRACK button changed as follows:
MEDIA button CD:
Press the SEEK/TRACK button while a CD
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button until or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the 1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
the CD mode is displayed on the screen. beginning of the current track. Press CD with MP3 or WMA:
CD/MP3 display mode the SEEK/TRACK button several times to
skip backward several tracks. 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text Press the SEEK/TRACK button while a CD 1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-
may be displayed on the screen if the CD has or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one peated.
been encoded with text information. Depending track. Press the SEEK/TRACK button sev-
on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa- eral times to skip forward several tracks. If the last 1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-
tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis- track on a CD is skipped, the first track on the peated.
played. disc is played. If the last track in a folder of an OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
The track number and the total number of tracks MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the cator on the display will turn off.
in the current folder or on the current disc are next folder is played.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
displayed on the screen as well. the screen unless no pattern is applied.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53


RDM (random) button Additional features
When the RDM (random) button is pressed while
a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be For additional information, refer to “iPod® player
changed as follows: operation without Navigation System” regarding
the iPod® player available with this system in this
CD: section.
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF For additional information, refer to “USB (Univer-
sal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models without
CD with MP3 or WMA:
Navigation System)” regarding the USB connec-
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF tion port available with this system in this section.
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®
played randomly. streaming audio without Navigation System”
about the Bluetooth® audio interface available
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
with this system in this section.
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
CD EJECT button

When the CD EJECT button is pressed


with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc
will eject and the last source will be played.
When the CD EJECT button is pressed
twice with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal.
If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the
disc will reload.
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
7. BACK button
8. TUNE/SCROLL knob, ENTER/AUDIO but-
ton
9. Display screen
10. POWER button/ VOLUME control knob
11. AUX button
12. CD button
13. SXM button*
The [ ] button launches the Smartphone
Integration Mode. For additional information, re-
fer to “NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps” in this
section.
*No satellite radio reception is available when the
SXM button is pressed to access satellite radio
stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-
tenna are installed and an SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-
LHA2901 tion precautions” regarding all operation precau-
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH 3. CD insert slot tions in this section.
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type 4. Backward seek button
B) (if so equipped)
5. button
1. FM-AM button
6. Forward seek button
2. CD eject button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
Audio main operation To turn the system off, press the POWER button. Audio settings
POWER button/ VOLUME control knob Turn the VOLUME control knob to adjust the 1. Press the [ ] button.
volume.
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON 2. Touch the “Settings” key.
position, and then push the POWER button while This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-
the system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume 3. Touch the “Audio” key.
AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod) which was changes as the driving speed changes. Use the touch-screen to adjust the following
playing immediately before the system was items to the desired setting:
turned off.
Audio
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the ve-
hicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to
vehicle speed.
AUX Volume Level/AUX Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options are
Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/AUDIO control knob and turning it to select the item to adjust. When the desired
item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/AUDIO button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button
is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


SXM settings SXM band select Tuning with the touch-screen
To view the SXM settings: When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned
Pressing the SXM button will change the band as
using the touch-screen. To bring up the visual
1. Press the [ ] button. follows:
tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower right
2. Touch the “Settings” key. SXM1* → SXM2* → SXM3*→ SXM1* (satellite, corner of the screen. A screen appears with a bar
if so equipped) running from low frequencies on the left to high
3. Touch the “SXM” key. frequencies on the right. Touch the screen at the
The signal strength, activation status and other When the SXM button is pressed while the igni-
tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the location of the frequency you wish to tune and the
information are displayed on the screen. station will change to that frequency. To return to
radio will come on at the last station played.
the regular radio display screen, touch the “OK”
FM/AM/SAT radio operation The last station played will also come on when key.
FM·AM button the POWER button is pressed.
Tuning with the TUNE/SCROLL knob
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as *When the SXM button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional The radio can also be manually tuned using the
follows: TUNE/SCROLL knob. When in FM or AM mode,
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left for lower
active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies.
If another audio source is playing when the When in SXM mode, turn the TUNE/SCROLL
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play- Hawaii and Guam.
knob to change the channel.
ing will automatically be turned off and the last If a compact disc is playing when the SXM button
radio station played will begin playing. is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be SEEK tuning
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on turned off and the last radio station played will
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the come on. When in FM or AM mode, press the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto- While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation or seek buttons to tune from low to high or
matically changes from stereo to monaural re- can be controlled through the touch-screen. high to low frequencies and to stop at the next
ception. Touch the “Channels” key to display a list of broadcasting station.
channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list to When in SXM mode, press the or
change to that channel. Touch the “Categories” seek buttons to change the category.
key to display a list of categories. Touch a cat-
egory displayed on the list to display options
within that category.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other keys can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Presets can also be selected by touching the
desired preset number on the screen.

LHA2899 LHA3085
1 to 6 Station memory operations Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if so
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for equipped):
FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for the The Smart Favorites feature allows the user to
SXM band (six for SXM1, six for SXM2, six for designate presets, within the SXM1, SXM2 and
SXM3 bands, as their Smart Favorites. When any
SXM3).
of the Smart Favorite presets are selected, the
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 current track on that station will play from the
using the FM·AM select button or choose beginning of the song.
the radio band SXM1, SXM2, SXM3 using
the SXM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual or
seek tuning. Touch and hold any of the de-
sired station memory keys (1 – 6) until a
beep sound is heard.
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
To program a Smart Favorite preset: REPLAY To replay a track from the
1. Press the SXM button. beginning, press the
seek button. The user can
2. Touch the “Setup” key.
continue to press the
3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate (ON) seek button to replay previ-
or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favorites.
ous songs, but can only go
4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an back as far as the system
available preset. permits. The system will
For additional information, refer to “1 to 6 station warn the user when they
memory operations” in this section regarding pre-
set memory options. cannot skip any further back
by displaying “At the End” in
NOTE: the bottom left corner of the
• Smart Favorites will start functioning only
LHA3087 screen.
after the audio unit is turned on for a few Replay Screen
minutes. The Replay Screen gives the user the ability to
• Tune Start is supported for music chan- SKIP To skip a track, press
replay, skip, pause or rewind the currently aired
nels only. the track button.
track.
“Live” will appear in the bot-
When the “Replay” key is touched, the Replay
tom left corner of the screen
Screen is prompted.
indicating the difference
from play time to live audio.

PAUSE To pause a track, press


the pause button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59


REWIND/ To rewind/ fast forward a Compact disc (CD) player operation CD button
FAST FOR- track, hold the or If the radio is already operating, it automatically When the CD button is pressed with the system
WARD seek/track button. turns off and the compact disc begins to play. off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.
CD/MP3 display mode

Menu item
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text is
CD/MP3 being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist,
album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Ran-
Random dom” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the display. To cancel
Random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer highlighted.
Repeat Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat”
alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the
display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted
Browse Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to begin
playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Fol-
low the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


SEEK (Reverse or Fast AUX button
Forward) buttons The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any stan-
dard analog audio input such as from a portable
Press and hold the or seek buttons cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing computer. Press the AUX button to play a com-
to reverse or fast forward the track being played. patible device plugged into the AUX IN jack.
The compact disc plays at an increased speed
while reversing or fast forwarding. When the but- CD EJECT button
ton is released, the compact disc returns to nor-
mal play speed. When the CD EJECT button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc
SEEK buttons will eject and the last source will be played.
If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the
Press the seek button while a CD or disc will reload.
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin- LHA2929
ning of the current track. Press the seek
Additional features
button several times to skip backward several
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
For additional information, refer to “iPod® player
tracks. operation with Navigation System”in this section. CONNECTION PORT (models
Press the seek button while a CD or without Navigation System) (if so
For additional information, refer to “USB (Univer-
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track. sal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models with equipped)
Press the seek button several times to skip Navigation System)” in this section.
forward several tracks. If the last track on a CD is Connecting a device to the USB
skipped, the first track on the disc is played. If the For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Connection Port
last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is streaming audio with Navigation System” in this
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played. section. WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent or serious injury.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61


When a compatible storage device is plugged reverse or fast forward the track being played.
CAUTION
into the connection port, compatible audio files The track plays at an increased speed while
● To avoid damage and loss of function on the storage device can be played through the reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is
when using a USB device, note the fol- vehicle’s audio system. released, the audio file returns to normal play
lowing precautions. speed.
● Do not force the USB device into the
Audio file operation
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
USB port. Inserting the USB device MEDIA button
tilted or up-side-down into the port may buttons
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
damage the port. Make sure that the position and press the MEDIA button to switch to Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-
USB device is connected correctly into the USB input mode. If a CD is playing or another dio file on the USB device is playing to return to
the USB port. audio source is plugged in through the AUX IN the beginning of the current track. Press the
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so jack located in the center console, the MEDIA SEEK/CAT button several times to skip
equipped) when pulling the USB device button toggles between the three sources. backward several tracks.
out of the port. This could damage the Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-
port and the cover. Play information
dio file on the USB device is playing to advance
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place Information about the audio files being played one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button
where it can be pulled unintentionally. can be displayed on the display screen of the several times to skip forward several tracks. If the
Pulling the cable may damage the port. vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the last track in a folder on the USB device is
audio files are encoded, information such as skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor- Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.
mation regarding the proper use and care of the RDM (random) button
The track number and number of total tracks in When the RDM (random) button is pressed while
device. the folder are displayed on the screen as well. an audio file on the USB device is playing, the
The USB connection port is located on the center SEEK•CAT/TRACK play pattern can be changed as follows:
console beneath the heater and air conditioner
(Reverse or Fast Forward) All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
controls. Insert the USB device into the connec-
tion port. button All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be
played randomly.
Press and hold the or
SEEK•CAT/TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds 1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
while an audio file on the USB device is playing to will be played randomly.
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The TUNE/SCROLL knob
indicator on the display will turn off.
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the
The current play pattern of the USB device is USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip
applied. back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio
RPT (repeat) button
files on the USB device, turning the
When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed while TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-
an audio file on the USB device is playing, the turn to the first track on the USB device.
play pattern can be changed as follows:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-
peated.
LHA2929
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re-
peated.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models with
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off.
Navigation System) (if so equipped)
The current play pattern of the USB device is Connecting a device to the USB
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is Connection Port
applied.
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent or serious injury.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63


When a compatible storage device is plugged
CAUTION
into the connection port, compatible audio files
● To avoid damage and loss of function on the storage device can be played through the
when using a USB device, note the fol- vehicle’s audio system.
lowing precautions.
Audio file operation
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device AUX button
tilted or up-side-down into the port may Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
damage the port. Make sure that the position and press the AUX button to switch to
USB device is connected correctly into the USB input mode. If another audio source is
the USB port. playing and a USB memory device is inserted,
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so press the AUX button until the center display
equipped) when pulling the USB device changes to the USB memory mode.
out of the port. This could damage the If the system has been turned off while the USB LHA2923
port and the cover. memory was playing, press the POWER button Play information
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place to restart the USB memory.
where it can be pulled unintentionally. Information about the audio files being played is
Pulling the cable may damage the port. shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s
audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor- of folders and files on the USB device. Touch the
mation regarding the proper use and care of the name of a song on the screen to begin playing
device. that song.
The USB connection port is located on the center
console beneath the heater and air conditioner
controls. Insert the USB device into the connec-
tion port.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


SEEK/CAT and TRACK Repeat
buttons Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the USB device. When the Repeat
Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au- mode is active, the icon will illuminate. By touch-
dio file on the USB device is playing to return to ing the “Repeat” key again, the ”Repeat Track”
the beginning of the current track. Press the key appears. By touching the “Repeat” key once
SEEK/CAT button several times to skip more, the “Repeat Folder” key appears. . To can-
backward several tracks. cel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no
Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au- icons are illuminated.
dio file on the USB device is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.
LHA2929
Random and repeat play mode
While files on a USB device are playing, the play iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
or played randomly. so equipped)
Random Connecting iPod®
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the USB device. When the Random
WARNING
mode is active, the icon will illuminate. By touch-
ing the “Random” key again, the ”Random Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
Folder” key appears. By touching the “Random” USB device while driving. Doing so can be
key once more, the “Random All” key appears. To a distraction. If distracted you could lose
cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
until no icons are illuminated. dent or serious injury.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65


will be charged while connected to the vehicle ● iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-
CAUTION
with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi- sion 1.0.4 or later)
● Do not force the USB device into the tion.
USB port. Inserting the USB device ● iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware ver-
tilted or up-side-down into the port may While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can sion 1.0.2 or later)
damage the port. Make sure that the only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
● iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware ver-
USB device is connected correctly into To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re- sion 1.1 or later)
the USB port. move the USB end of the cable from the USB ● iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so connection port on the vehicle, then remove the version 4.2.1 or later)
equipped) when pulling the USB device cable from the iPod®.
out of the port. This could damage the ● iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware ver-
port and the cover. * iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in sion 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0 required
the U.S. and other countries. for smartphone integration)
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally. Compatibility ● iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware ver-
Pulling the cable may damage the port. sion 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0 required
The following models are compatible:
for smartphone integration)
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor- ● iPod® Classic - 5th Generation (firmware
mation regarding the proper use and care of the ● iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)
version 1.3.0 or later)
device. ● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● iPod® Classic - 6th Generation (firmware
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the (minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone
version 2.0.1 or later)
integration)
iPod® can be controlled with the audio system
● iPod® Classic - 7th Generation (firmware
controls and display screen, use the USB con- ● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
version 2.0.4 or later)
nection port located on the center console below (minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone
the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect ● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver- integration)
the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod® sion 1.3.1 or later)
● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
and the USB end of the cable to the USB con- ● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver- (minimum iOS 5.0 required for smartphone
nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® sup- sion 1.1.3 or later) integration)
ports charging via a USB connection, its battery
● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver- Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to
sion 1.1.3 or later) the version indicated above.
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Audio main operation All Repeat: all songs in the current list are re-
peated.
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.
position. Press the MEDIA button repeatedly to
switch to the iPod® mode. RANDOM (RDM)
If the system has been turned off while the iPod® When the RDM button is pressed while a track is
was playing, pressing the VOL/ control being played, the play pattern can be changed as
knob will start the iPod®. follows:
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Album Shuffle →
Shuffle Off
When the SEEK/CAT button or
TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 sec- Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will be
onds while the iPod® is playing, the next track or played randomly.
the beginning of the current track on the iPod® Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list will
will be played. LHA2929
be played randomly.
When the SEEK/CAT button or iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.
TRACK button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec- NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
onds while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® will BACK button equipped)
play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the When the BACK button is pressed, it re-
button is released, the iPod® will return to the turns to the previous menu. Connecting iPod®
normal play speed.
REPEAT (RPT) WARNING
When the RPT button is pressed while a track is Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
being played, the play pattern can be changed as USB device while driving. Doing so can be
follows: a distraction. If distracted you could lose
Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat → control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
Repeat Off dent or serious injury.

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re-


peated.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
will be charged while connected to the vehicle ● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware ver-
CAUTION
with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi- sion 1.3.1 or later)
● Do not force the USB device into the tion.
USB port. Inserting the USB device ● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver-
tilted or up-side-down into the port may While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can sion 1.1.3 or later)
damage the port. Make sure that the only be operated by the vehicle audio controls. ● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver-
USB device is connected correctly into To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re- sion 1.1.3 or later)
the USB port. move the USB end of the cable from the USB ● iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware ver-
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so connection port on the vehicle, then remove the sion 1.0.4 or later)
equipped) when pulling the USB device cable from the iPod®.
out of the port. This could damage the ● iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware ver-
port and the cover. * iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in sion 1.0.2 or later)
the U.S. and other countries.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place ● iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware ver-
where it can be pulled unintentionally. Compatibility sion 1.1 or later)
Pulling the cable may damage the port. The following models are compatible: ● iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-
● iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware ver- ● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)
mation regarding the proper use and care of the
sion 1.3.0 or later) ● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
device.
● iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware ver- ● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the sion 2.0.1 or later)
iPod® can be controlled with the audio system * Some features of this iPod® may not be fully
controls and display screen, use the USB con- ● iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware ver- functional.
nection port located on the center console below sion 2.0.4 or later)
the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to
● iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware ver- the version indicated above.
the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod® sion 4.2.1 or later)*
and the USB end of the cable to the USB con-
nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® sup- ● iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware ver-
ports charging via a USB connection, its battery sion 5.1 or later)
● iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware ver-
sion 5.1 or later)
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● Artists
● Albums
● Genres
● Songs
● Composers
● Audiobooks
● Podcasts
Shuffle and repeat play mode
While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern can
be altered so that songs are repeated or played
LHA2911 LHA2907 randomly.
Audio main operation Interface Shuffle
The interface for iPod® operation shown on the Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random play
AUX button
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle mode is
When the AUX button is pressed with the system active, the text is illuminated. Touching the
the iPod® interface. Use the touch-screen,
off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn “Shuffle” key once more will display the “Shuffle
BACK button or the scrolling knob to navigate
on. If another audio source is playing and the songs” key. To cancel Shuffle mode, touch the
iPod® is connected, press the AUX button re- the menus on the screen. “Shuffle” key again until the text is no longer
peatedly until the center display changes to the When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” key illuminated.
iPod® mode. to bring up the iPod® interface.
Depending on the iPod® model, the following
items may be available on the menu list screen.
For additional information, refer to the iPod®
Owner’s Manual regarding each menu item.
● Playlists
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
Repeat BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat mode is
active, the text is illuminated. Touching the “Re- so equipped)
peat” key once more will display the “Repeat If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-
song” key. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the vice that is capable of playing audio files, the
“Repeat” key again until the text is no longer device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
illuminated. system so that the audio files on the device play
Seek buttons through the vehicle’s speakers.

Press the or seek button to skip


backward or forward one track.
Press and hold the or seek button
for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse LHA2279
or fast forward the track being played. The track Scrolling menus
plays at an increased speed while reversing or While navigating long lists of artists, albums or
fast forwarding. When the button is released, the songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll
track returns to normal play speed. the list by the first character in the name. To
activate character indexing, touch and hold the
“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the screen.
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to choose the
number or letter to jump to in the list and then
press the ENTER/AUDIO button.
If no character is selected after 2 seconds, the
display returns to normal.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


5. The system will display a PIN on the screen BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
and request confirmation that it matches the WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
one on the handset.
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-
6. Using the menu control switch on the steer- vice that is capable of playing audio files, the
ing wheel, select “Yes” and then press device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
the button. If the PIN does not match, system so that the audio files on the device play
the wrong device may have been selected through the vehicle’s speakers.
on the handset.

NOTE:
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional information,
LHA2775 refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual.
You can also visit
Connecting Bluetooth® audio www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions
vehicle, follow the procedure below: on connecting NISSAN recommended cel-
lular phones.
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
Audio main operation
2. Select “Bluetooth”.
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press
3. Select “Add Phone or Device”. This same the MEDIA button repeatedly until the
screen can be accessed to remove, replace Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
or select a different Bluetooth® device. screen.

4. The system acknowledges the command The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are dis-
and asks you to initiate connecting from the played on the screen. Use the Preset 3 button for
phone handset. play and the Preset 4 button for pause.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71


NOTE:
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional information,
refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual.
You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions
on connecting NISSAN recommended cel-
lular phones.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press
LHA3747 LHA2844
the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth®
audio mode is displayed on the screen.
Connecting Bluetooth® audio 4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are dis-
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the 5. The system acknowledges the command played on the screen.
vehicle, follow the procedure below: and asks you to initiate connecting from the
phone handset.
1. Press the [ ] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA0049 LHA2950

CD CARE AND CLEANING STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR


● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the AUDIO CONTROL
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc. The audio system can be operated using the
● Always place the discs in the storage case controls on the steering wheel.
when they are not being used. 1. SOURCE select switch
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the 2. Menu control switch/ENTER button
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular 3. (back) button
motion. 4. Volume control switch
● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73


SOURCE select switch AM and FM ● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number (if
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi- ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to playing compressed audio files).
tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio increase or decrease the preset station.
system on. ● Press the ENTER button to show the CD
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to Menu.
Push the source select switch to change the seek up or down to the next station.
mode in the following sequence: USB
● Press the ENTER button to show the list of
AM → FM1 → FM2 → SXM1 (satellite radio, if so preset stations. ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
equipped) → SXM2 (satellite radio, if so equip- increase or decrease the track number.
SXM (if so equipped)
ped)→SXM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped) → ● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
CD* → USB/iPod®*→ Bluetooth® Audio* →Au- ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number.
dio App*→ AUX* → AM. increase or decrease the preset station.
● Press the ENTER button to show the USB
* These modes are only available when compat- ● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to Menu.
ible media storage is inserted into the device or go to the next or previous channel.
connected to the system. Bluetooth® Audio
● Press the ENTER button to show the SXM ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
Volume control switch Menu. skip ahead or back to the next song.
Push the volume control switch to increase or iPod® ● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
decrease the volume.
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward the current song.
Menu control increase or decrease the track number. AUX
switch/ENTER button ● Press the ENTER button to show the iPod ● Press the ENTER button to show the AUX
While the display is showing a map or audio Menu. Menu.
screen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward or CD
downward to select a station, track, CD or folder.
For most audio sources, tilting the switch ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
up/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a increase or decrease the track number.
different function than a tilting up/down for less
than 1.5 seconds.
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NISSANCONNECTSM MOBILE APPS
(if so equipped)

ANTENNA This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone Inte- CONNECT PHONE


gration technology. This allows many compatible
The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be Smartphone applications to be displayed and To use this feature, a compatible smartphone
removed. When you need to remove the antenna, easily controlled through the vehicle’s display must be connected via Bluetooth® or USB to the
turn the antenna rod counterclockwise. screen. vehicle. For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod
NOTE: Navigation System” or “Bluetooth® Hands-Free
clockwise and hand tighten.
Phone System with Navigation System” in this
A compatible smartphone and registration section.
CAUTION is required to use mobile applications or to
● Always properly tighten the antenna access connected features of certain ve- NOTE:
rod during installation or the antenna hicle applications.
For vehicles with navigation, Apple iP-
rod may break during vehicle operation. REGISTERING WITH hones® REQUIRE the phone to be plugged
● Be sure that the antenna is removed NISSANCONNECTSM MOBILE APPS in via USB for NissanConnect Mobile Apps
before the vehicle enters an automatic to function.
car wash. To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is For vehicles without Navigation, Apple iP-
necessary for the user to register. In order to hones® must be paired via Bluetooth® for
● Be sure to fold down the antenna be- register, visit the NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps NissanConnect Mobile Apps to function.
fore the vehicle enters a garage with a website, www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or
low ceiling. https://canada.nissanconnect.com and sign up NOTE:
or create an account through the prompts on the
NissanConnect Mobile Apps. Once registered, For Android phones, NissanConnect Mo-
download the NissanConnect Mobile Apps from bile Apps REQUIRES the phone to be
your compatible phone’s application download paired via Bluetooth®.
source and then log into the application. If you
already have an account created through the
App, please log in.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75


SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)

APPLICATION DOWNLOAD Apple Siri® personal assistant can be accessed REQUIREMENTS


from the vehicle. Siri can be accessed in Siri Eyes
Once connected, the NissanConnect App will Free mode to reduce user distraction. In this Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or later.
search your phone to determine which compat- mode, Siri is available for interaction by voice. Devices released before iPhones® 4S are not
ible applications are currently installed. The user After connecting a compatible Apple device by compatible with the Siri Eyes Free System. Visit
will then choose which apps they want to bring Bluetooth®, Siri can be activated from the switch www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device
into their vehicle from the list of apps within the on the steering wheel. compatibility.
“Manage My Apps” section of the NissanCon-
● Some Siri functions, such as displaying pic- Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please check
nect App on their smartphone. The vehicle will
tures or opening apps, may not be available phone settings.
then download the in-vehicle interface for each of
these compatible applications. Once down- while driving. If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
loaded, the user can access their selected smart- ● For getting best results, always update your accessible from the lock screen. Please check
phone applications through the vehicle touch- device to the latest software version. phone settings.
screen. For additional information, refer to
www.nissanusa.com/connect or ● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as For best results, always update your device to the
https://canada.nissanconnect.com regarding possible. Close the windows to eliminate the latest software version.
application availability. surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands cor-
rectly.
● For functions that can be used in Siri, please
refer to the Apple website.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


Switch action can also be changed from the Example 2 — Replying to text messages
Bluetooth® setting menu. For additional informa-
1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected and
tion, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
“Show Notifications” on the iPhone settings
OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE is enabled, the vehicle will display a notifica-
tion for new incoming text messages.
After starting Siri®, the user may push
switch on the steering wheel again within 5 sec- 2. After reading the message, push or push
onds of the end of Siri announcement to extend and hold the switch to reply by Siri.
the session. 3. After the Siri beep, say “Text message” or a
1. Push or push and hold the switch on similar command to reply to Siri.
the steering wheel.
2. Speak your command and then listen to Siri
to reply.
LHA3803
Example 1 — Playing music
SIRI® ACTIVATION
1. Push or push and hold the switch on
Siri® function can be activated by pushing the steering wheel.
switch on the steering wheel. The button opera-
tion for activating Siri function must be selected 2. Say “Play <music>”, for example “Play The
before using the Siri function. Smiths”.

1. Connect an Siri enabled iPhone® to the 3. Your vehicle will automatically change to
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode when the
“Connecting procedure” in this section. music starts playing.

2. After the Bluetooth® connection is estab-


lished, switch operation select screen is dis-
played.
3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for the
Siri activation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure


Check if the Apple iPhone® is connected by Bluetooth®.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Settings —> General —> Siri.
Cannot access Siri from Confirm Siri can be accessed from device lock screen. On your phone, go to Settings —> Touch ID & Passcode (or Passcode on some older devices).
switch on the steering wheel Scroll down to Allow Access When Locked section.
Confirm the setting for Siri activation on the audio headunit. If the setting is Long Press, a press and hold of 1.5 seconds on the steering wheel switch
is required to start Siri. If the setting is Short Press, a short press and release of the switch should start Siri.
Audio Source does not For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may
change automatically to vary.
iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade performance.
mode Check other audio sources manually by pressing the Source button on the radio or steering wheel switch.
Play, pause, next track, previ- For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may
ous track or play timer does vary and is controlled by the device.
not work
Cannot hear any music/ Confirm audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
audio from iPhone®
Cannot hear map turn-by- Confirm audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
turn direction guidance from
iPhone®
Cannot receive text message Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your iPhone®. On the phone, go to Settings —> Bluetooth. Find the device name, like “My Juke”. Press the
notifications on audio head- info button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
unit
Cannot reply to text mes- After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Press the switch on the steering wheel for Siri. After Siri starts, say “Text
sage notifications by Siri Message”.

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
CAUTION WARNING
your vehicle, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may ● Keep the antenna as far away as pos- ● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
adversely affect the engine control system and sible from the electronic control in a safe location. If you have to use a
other electronic parts. modules. phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
WARNING be given to vehicle operation.
(20 cm) away from the electronic control
● A cellular phone should not be used for system harnesses. Do not route the an- ● If you are unable to devote full attention
any purpose while driving so full atten- tenna wire next to any harness. to vehicle operation while talking on
tion may be given to vehicle operation. the phone, pull off the road to a safe
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of location and stop your vehicle.
as recommended by the manufacturer.
cellular phones while driving.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB CAUTION
● If you must make a call while your ve- radio chassis to the body.
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
lar phone operational mode is highly ● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. use a phone after starting the engine.
recommended. Exercise extreme cau-
tion at all times so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79


phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-
hicle.

NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If
your phone does not connect automatic
ally to the system, consult the phone’s
Owner’s Manual for details on device op-
eration.
You can connect up to five different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
LHA3127 phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com- your cellular phone in the vehicle. ● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you may not be recognized or work properly.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
can set up the wireless connection between your
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con- or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
necting procedure is required. Your phone is mended phone list and connecting instruc-
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
automatically connected with the in-vehicle tions.
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● You will not be able to use a hands-free ● Some cellular phones or other devices may IC Regulatory information
phone under the following conditions: cause interference or a buzzing noise to
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
come from the audio system speakers. Stor- ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
ing the device in a different location may ence, and (2) this device must accept any
vice area.
reduce or eliminate the noise. interference, including interference that may
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is cause undesired operation of the device.
● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
regarding the telephone charges, cellular – This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
phone antenna and body, etc. quirements of the Canadian Interference-
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area. ● For additional information, refer to “Trouble- Causing Equipment Regulations.
shooting guide” in this section. You can also
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for BLUETOOTH® is a
from being dialed. troubleshooting help if the hands-free phone trademark owned by
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal system seems to be malfunctioning. Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be REGULATORY INFORMATION and licensed to
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur- Visteon.
FCC Regulatory information
ing a call.
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with USING THE SYSTEM
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
surrounded by metal or far away from the The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands-
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone modification, or attachments could damage
quality degradation and wireless connection Free Phone System.
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
disruption. tions. If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
● While a cellular phone is connected through not be available so full attention may be given to
– Operation is subject to the following two con- vehicle operation.
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the ditions:
battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
1. This device may not cause interference and
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge 2. this device must accept any interference,
cellular phones. including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
Initialization ● For calling contacts by name, please say ● You can cancel a command when the sys-
both the first and last name of the contact for tem is waiting for a response by saying,
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON better recognition. “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, “Cancel” and ends the Voice Recognition
which takes a few seconds. If the button is Giving voice commands session. You can also press and hold
pressed before the initialization completes, the To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press the button on the steering wheel for
system will announce “Hands-free phone system 5 seconds at any time to end the Voice
and release the button located on the
not ready” and will not react to voice commands. Recognition session. Whenever the Voice
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a Recognition session is cancelled, a double
Operating tips command. beep is played to indicate you have exited
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN The command given is picked up by the micro- the system.
Voice Recognition system, observe the following: phone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted. ● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as feedback, press the volume control switches
possible. Keep all vents pointed away from ● If you need to hear the available commands (+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
the microphone and close the windows to for the current menu again, say “Help” and provided with feedback. You can also use
eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, the system will repeat them. the radio volume control knob.
vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent ● If a command is not recognized, the system Voice Prompt Interrupt
the system from recognizing voice com- announces, “Command not recognized. In most cases you can interrupt the voice feed-
mands correctly. Please try again.” Make sure the command is back to speak the next command by pressing
● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a said exactly as prompted by the system and the button on the steering wheel. After
command. Otherwise, the command will not repeat the command in a clear voice. interrupting the system, wait for a beep before
be received properly. speaking your command.
● If you want to go back to the previous com-
● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc- One Shot Call
after the tone sounds. tion” any time the system is waiting for a To use the system faster, you may speak the
response. second level commands with the main menu
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing command on the main menu. For example, press
between words. the button and after the tone say, “Call
Redial”.

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


You can also use the button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. For
additional information, refer to
“Voice Commands” and “During a
call” in this section.

PHONE/END
While the voice recognition sys-
tem is active, press and hold
the button for 5 seconds to
quit the voice recognition system
LHA2273 at any time. LHA2775

CONTROL BUTTONS CONNECTING PROCEDURE


Tuning switch
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands- NOTE:
While using the voice recognition
Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel. system, tilt the tuning switch up or The connecting procedure must be per-
down to manually control the formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
PHONE/SEND vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
phone system.
Press the button to initiate the procedure will be cancelled.
a Voice Recognition session or
answer an incoming call.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83


To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System:
1. Press the SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER but-
ton.
Menu Item Result
Bluetooth ON/OFF Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.
On Turns Bluetooth® functionality on
Off Turns Bluetooth® functionality off
Add Phone or Device Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and complete the
connection process.
Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded using the previ-
ous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.

The connecting procedure varies according to each phone. For additional information, refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on connecting recommended
cellular phones.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


VOICE COMMANDS “Phonebook” ● Transfer Entry
This command can be used to transfer mul-
Voice commands can be used to operate the The following commands are available under tiple contacts at a time. To enable manual
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Press “Phonebook”: contact transfer capability, set “Phonebook
the button and say “Phone” to bring up the
● (a name) Download” to “Off” in the Setting menu. The
phone command menu. The available options ability to transfer contacts via the OPP
are: Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a
list of options for that phonebook entry. The Bluetooth® profile depends on your mobile
● Call system will say the name it interpreted based phone. For additional information, refer to
on the voice command provided. If the name your phone’s Owner’s Manual.
● Phonebook
is incorrect, say “Correction” to hear another ● Delete Entry
● Recent Calls name. Speak this command to delete an entry in
● Messaging (if available) Once the correct phonebook entry is identi- the phonebook. Choose an entry to delete
fied, say “Dial” to dial the number or “Send by speaking the desired name or say “List
● Show Applications (if so equipped) Text” to send a text message to that number. Names”.
● Select Phone or Device Say “Record Name” to record a name for the
phonebook entry. Say “Delete Recording” to “Recent Calls”
“Call” delete a recorded name for the phonebook
For additional information, refer to “Making a call” entry. The following commands are available under
in this section. “Recent Calls”:
● List Names
Speak this command to have the system list ● Incoming Calls
the names in the phonebook one by one Speak this command to list the last five
alphabetically. Say “Dial” to dial the number incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
of the current name or “Send Text” to send a from an entry in the phonebook, the name
text message to that number. Say “Next En- will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone
try” or “Previous Entry” to move through the number of the incoming call will be dis-
list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to played.
record a name for the current phonebook Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a to send a text message to that number. Say
recorded name for the current phonebook “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
entry. through the list of incoming calls.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
● Missed Calls “Messaging” 3. Select one of the available voice commands
Speak this command to list the last five Speak this command to access text messaging to continue:
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from
an entry in the phonebook, the name will be
functions. For additional information, refer to ● “(a name)” – Speak the name of a phone-
“Text messaging” in this section. book entry to place a call to that entry. The
displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of
the missed call will be displayed. system will respond with the name it inter-
“Show Applications” (if so equipped)
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text” preted from your command and will prompt
to send a text message to that number. Say Speak this command to display list of smart- you to confirm that the name is correct. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move phone apps available. “Yes” to initiate the call or “No” to hear an-
through the list of missed calls. other name from the phonebook.
NOTE:
● Outgoing Calls ● “Number” – Speak this command to place a
Speak this command to list the last five Compatible smartphone and registration call by inputting numbers.
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call necessary to access applications. For addi- For 7- and 10-digit phone numbers, speak
was to an entry in the phonebook, the name tional information, refer to “NissanCon- the numbers. When finished, say “Dial” to
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone nectSM Mobile Apps” in this section. initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any time
number of the outgoing call will be dis- in the process to correct a misspoken or
played. “Select Phone or Device” misinterpreted number.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text” For phone numbers with more digits or spe-
Speak this command to select a phone to use
to send a text message to that number. Say cial characters, say “Special Number”, then
from a list of those phones connected to the
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
vehicle. speak the digits. Up to 24 digits can be
through the list of outgoing calls.
entered. Available special characters are
● Redial MAKING A CALL “star”, “pound”, “plus” and “pause”. When
Speak this command to call the last number To make a call from a phone connected to the finished, say “Dial” to initiate the call. Say
dialed. “Correction” at any time in the process to
vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
● Call Back tem: correct a misspoken or misinterpreted num-
Speak this command to call the number of ber or character.
the last incoming call to the vehicle. 1. Press the button.
2. The system will prompt you for a command.
Say “Call”.

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


● “Redial” – Speak this command to dial the ● “Send” – Speak this command followed by Press the button to accept the call. Press
number of the last outgoing call. The system the digits to enter digits during the phone the button to reject the call.
will display “Redialing <name/number>”. call.
The name of the phonebook entry will be ENDING A CALL
● “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the com-
displayed if it available, otherwise the num- To end an active call, press the button.
mand to mute or unmute the system.
ber being redialed will be displayed.
● “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to TEXT MESSAGING
● “Call Back” – Speak this command to dial
transfer the call to the handset. To transfer
the number of the last incoming call. The
the call back from the handset to the WARNING
system will display “Calling back
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, ● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
<name/number>”. The name of the phone-
book entry will be displayed if it available, press the button and confirm when the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check lo-
otherwise the number being called back will prompted. cal regulations before using this
be displayed. If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth® feature.
Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting
● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
RECEIVING A CALL functionality. If a call is received while another call
the use of some of the applications and
When a call is received by the phone connected is already active, a message will be displayed on
features, such as social networking and
to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone the screen. Press the button to hold the texting. Check local regulations for any
System, the call information is displayed on either active call and switch to the second call. Press requirements.
the vehicle information display or both the vehicle the button to reject the second call.
While the second call is active, pressing ● Use the text messaging feature after
information display and the control panel display.
stopping your vehicle in a safe location.
the button will allow the same commands If you have to use the feature while
Press the button to accept the call. Press that are available during any call as well as two driving, exercise extreme caution at all
the button to reject the call. additional commands: times so full attention may be given to
DURING A CALL ● “Switch Call” – Speak this command to hold vehicle operation.
the second call and switch back to the origi- ● If you are unable to devote full attention
While a call is active, press the button to
nal call. to vehicle operation while using the text
access additional options. Speak one of the fol-
lowing commands: ● “End Other Call” – Speak this command to messaging feature, pull off the road to a
stay with the second call and end the original safe location and stop your vehicle.
call.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
NOTE: 4. The system will provide a list of available ● “No”
commands in order to determine the recipi-
Many phones may require special permis- ● “Where are you?”
ent of the text message. Choose from the
sion to enable text messaging. Check the ● “When?”
following:
phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.
For some phones, you may need to enable ● To (a name) ● “Custom Messages”
‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®
● Enter Number To send one of the custom messages, say
menu for text messages to appear on the “Custom Messages”. If more than one cus-
headunit. Please consult your phone’s ● Missed Calls tom message is stored, the system will
Owner’s manual. Text message integration prompt for the number of the desired cus-
● Incoming Calls
requires that the phone support MAP (Mes- tom message. For additional information on
sage Access Profile) for both receiving and ● Outgoing Calls setting and managing custom text mes-
sending text messages. Some phones may sages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this
For additional information about these op-
not support all text messaging features. section.
tions, refer to “Voice commands” in this sec-
Please refer to Reading a received text message:
tion.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility 5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system 1. Press the button on the steering
prompts for which message to send. Nine wheel.
information, as well as your device’s Own-
er’s manual. predefined messages are available as well 2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
as three custom messages. To choose one
The system allows for the sending and receiving of the predefined messages, speak one of
of text messages through the vehicle interface. the following after the tone:
Sending a text message: ● “Driving, can’t text”
1. Press the button on the steering ● “Call me”
wheel. ● “On my way”
2. Say “Phone” after the tone. ● “Running late”
3. Say “Send Text” after the tone. ● “Okay”
● “Yes”
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone. Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)
The text message, sender and delivery time are If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, it
shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to can also be used to create custom messages
scroll through all text messages if more than one that are sent through the phone. For additional
information, refer to “Siri® Eyes Free” in this
are available. Press the button to exit the section.
text message screen. Press the button to
access the following options for replying to the NOTE:
text message:
Text messages are only displayed if the
● Call Back vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Speak this command to call the sender of
the text message using the Bluetooth® NOTE:
Hands-Free Phone System.
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
● Send Text only be sent through Siri. LHA2894
Speak this command to send a text message
response to the sender of the text message. BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
● Read Text To access and adjust the settings for the
Speak this command to read the text mes- Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
sage again. 1. Press the SETTING button.
● Previous Text 2. Use the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select
Speak this command to move to the previ- “Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER but-
ous text message (if available). ton:
● Next Text ● Bluetooth
Speak this command to move to the next text Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s
message (if available). Bluetooth® system on or off.
● Add Phone or Device
For additional information, refer to “Con-
necting procedure” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
● Delete Phone or Device ● New Text Sound ● Auto Reply Message
Select to delete a phone from the displayed Select to adjust the volume of the sound that Select to choose the message that is sent
list. The system will ask to confirm before plays when a new text is received by a phone when the Auto Reply function is enabled.
deleting the phone. connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Choose from “I’m Driving” or one of the three
Phone System. The setting all the way to the custom messages stored in the system.
● Replace Phone left indicates that the new text sound will be
Select to replace a phone from the displayed ● Vehicle Signature On/Off
muted.
list. When a selection is made, the system Select to choose whether or not the vehicle
will ask to confirm before proceeding. The ● Show Incoming Text signature is added to outgoing text mes-
recorded phonebook for the phone being Select “Driver Only” to have incoming text sages from the vehicle. This message can-
messages displayed only in the vehicle infor- not be changed or customized.
deleted will be saved as long as the new
mation display. Select “Both” to have incom-
phone’s phonebook is the same as the old MANUAL CONTROL
ing text messages displayed in both the ve-
phone’s phonebook.
hicle information display and the center While using the Voice Recognition system, it is
● Select Phone or Device display screen. Select “None” to have no possible to select menu options by using the
Select to connect to a previously connected display of incoming text messages. steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
phone from the displayed list. ● Edit Custom Messages commands. To activate manual control mode,
Select to set a custom message that will be press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button on the
● Phonebook Download
available with the standard options when steering wheel to access the phone menu and
Select to turn on or off the automatic down-
sending a text message. To set a custom then press either up or down on the tuning switch
load of a connected phone’s phonebook.
message, send a text message to your own ( ).
● Show Incoming Calls phone number while the phone is connected The manual control mode does not allow dialing a
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming call to the system. Three custom messages can phone number by digits. The user may select an
information displayed only in the vehicle in- be set. Custom messages can only be set entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists.
formation display. Select “Both” to have in- while the vehicle is stationary. To reactivate Voice Recognition, exit the manual
coming call information displayed in both the control mode by pressing and holding the
● Auto Reply
vehicle information display and the center
Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply func- PHONE/END ( ) button. At that time, press-
display screen.
tion. When enabled, the vehicle will auto- ing the PHONE/SEND ( ) button will start
● Text Message matically send a predefined text message to the Hands Free Phone System.
Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text the sender when a text message is received
messaging feature. while driving.
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook” in this section.
phone book. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91


BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.

LHA3128
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com- your cellular phone in the vehicle.
patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
can set up the wireless connection between your
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
necting procedure is required. Your phone is
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
automatically reconnected with the in-vehicle
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
phone module when the ignition switch is placed ● You will not be able to use a hands-free ● While a cellular phone is connected through
in the ON position with the connected cellular phone under the following conditions: the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser- charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
You can register up to five different Bluetooth® vice area. Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is cellular phones.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time. difficult to receive cellular signal; such as ● Some cellular phones or other devices may
in a tunnel, in an underground parking cause interference or a buzzing noise to
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the garage, near a tall building or in a moun- come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
phone commands, so dialing a phone number tainous area. ing the device in a different location may
using your voice is possible. For additional infor-
reduce or eliminate the noise.
mation, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition Sys- – Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
tem” in this section. from being dialed. ● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual
regarding the battery, battery charging and
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone ● When the radio wave condition is not ideal cellular phone operations.
System, refer to the following notes. or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur- ● The signal strength display on the monitor
● Set up the wireless connection between a
ing a call. will not coincide with the signal strength
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
display of some cellular phones.
module before using the hands-free phone ● Immediately after the ignition switch is
system. placed in the ON position, it may be impos- ● For additional information, refer to “Trouble-
shooting guide” in this section. You can also
● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones sible to receive a call for a short period of
visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle time.
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshoot-
phone module. Please visit
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area ing help if the hands-free phone system
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
surrounded by metal or far away from the seems to be malfunctioning.
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting. in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93


REGULATORY INFORMATION BLUETOOTH® is a
FCC Regulatory information trademark owned by
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the and licensed to
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, Bosch.
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula- VOICE COMMANDS
tions. You can use voice commands to operate various
– Operation is subject to the following two con- Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features
ditions: using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice
1. This device may not cause interference and Recognition System” in this section.
2. this device must accept any interference, LHA3747
Voice Prompt Interrupt
including interference that may cause unde- CONNECTING PROCEDURE
sired operation of the device. While using the Voice Recognition system, the
system voice can be interrupted to allow the user
IC Regulatory information to speak commands. While the system is speak- NOTE:

– Operation is subject to the following two con- ing, press the button on the steering The connecting procedure must be per-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone will formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
be heard. After the tone, speak desired command vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
(displayed on the touch-screen). the procedure will be cancelled.
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device. One Shot Call 1. Press the [ ] button on the control
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re- To use the system faster, you may speak the panel.
quirements of the Canadian Interference- second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, press 2. Touch the “Settings” key.
Causing Equipment Regulations.
the button and after the tone say, “Call 3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
Redial”.
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


5. Initiate the connecting process from the MAKING A CALL To reject the incoming call, either:
handset. The system will display the mes- To make a call, follow the procedure below:
sage: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your ● Press the button on the steering
Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is displayed 1. Press the button on the control panel. wheel, or
on your Bluetooth® device, select “Yes” to The “Phone” screen will appear on the dis- ● Touch the red phone icon on the screen.
complete the pairing process. play.
For additional information, refer to the DURING A CALL
2. Select one of the following options to make a
Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual. While a call is active, the following options are
call:
available on the screen:
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK ● “Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry
● “Handset”
To access the vehicle phonebook: stored in the vehicle phonebook.
Select this option to switch control of the
1. Press the button on the control panel. ● “Call Lists”: Select the name from the in- phone call over to the handset.
coming, outgoing or missed.
2. Touch the “Phonebook” key. ● “Mute Mic.”
● “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from the Select this option to mute the microphone.
3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed vehicle. Select again to unmute the microphone.
list.
● “ ”: Input the phone number manually ● Red phone ( ) icon
4. The number of the entry will be displayed on
using a keypad displayed on the screen. For Select to end the phone call.
the screen. Touch the number to initiate di-
additional information, refer to “How to use
aling. ENDING A CALL
the touch-screen” in this section.
NOTE: To end a phone call, select the red phone ( )
RECEIVING A CALL icon on the screen or press the button on
To scroll quickly through the list, touch the When a call is placed to the connected phone, the steering wheel.
“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the the display will change to phone mode.
screen. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
To accept the incoming call, either:
choose a letter or number and then press
ENTER. The list will move to the first entry ● Press the button on the steering
that begins with that number or letter. wheel, or
● Touch the icon on the screen.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
TEXT MESSAGING NOTE: 4. The system will provide a list of available
commands in order to determine the recipi-
Many phones may require special permis-
WARNING ent of the text message. Choose from the
sion to enable text messaging. Check the
following:
● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.
the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check lo- For some phones, you may need to enable ● To (a name)
cal regulations before using this ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®
● Enter Number
feature. menu for text messages to appear on the
● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict headunit. Please consult your phone’s ● Missed Calls
the use of some of the applications and Owner’s manual. Text message integration
● Incoming Calls
features, such as social networking and requires that the phone support MAP (Mes-
texting. Check local regulations for any sage Access Profile) for both receiving and ● Outgoing Calls
requirements. sending text messages. Some phones may
For additional information about these op-
not support all text messaging features.
● Use the text messaging feature after tions, refer to “Voice commands” in this sec-
Please refer to
stopping your vehicle in a safe location. tion.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
If you have to use the feature while
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility 5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
driving, exercise extreme caution at all
information, as well as your device’s Own- prompts for which message to send. Nine
times so full attention may be given to
er’s manual. predefined messages are available as well
vehicle operation.
The system allows for the sending and receiving as three custom messages. To choose one
● If you are unable to devote full attention of text messages through the vehicle interface. of the predefined messages, speak one of
to vehicle operation while using the text the following after the tone:
messaging feature, pull off the road to a Sending a text message:
safe location and stop your vehicle. ● “Driving, can’t text”
1. Press the button on the steering ● “Call me”
wheel.
● “On my way”
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
● “Running late”
3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
● “Okay”
● “Yes”
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● “No” The text message, sender and delivery time are Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)
shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, it
● “Where are you?”
scroll through all text messages if more than one can also be used to create custom messages
● “When?” are available. Press the button to exit the that are sent through the phone. For additional
text message screen. Press the button to information, refer to “Siri® Eyes Free” in this
● “Custom Messages”
access the following options for replying to the section.
To send one of the custom messages, say text message:
“Custom Messages”. If more than one cus- NOTE:
tom message is stored, the system will ● Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender of Text messages are only displayed if the
prompt for the number of the desired cus-
the text message using the Bluetooth® vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
tom message. For additional information on
setting and managing custom text mes- Hands-Free Phone System.
NOTE:
sages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this ● Send Text
section. Speak this command to send a text message For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
response to the sender of the text message. only be sent through Siri.
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the button on the steering ● Read Text
wheel. Speak this command to read the text mes-
sage again.
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
● Previous Text
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone. Speak this command to move to the previ-
ous text message (if available).
● Next Text
Speak this command to move to the next text
message (if available).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97


BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [ ] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

LHA2844

Menu Item Result


Phone Settings For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.
Connect New Device Touch to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select Connected Device Touch to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Replace Connected Device Touch to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Delete Connected Device Touch to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Bluetooth Touch to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


PHONE SETTINGS ● Phone Notifications for: ● Custom Text Messages:
To access the phone settings: Touch “Driver” to have phone notifications Touch this option to select a custom mes-
shown in the vehicle information display. Se- sage to edit. There are four customer mes-
1. Press the [ ] button. lect “Both” to have phone notifications sage slots available.
shown in both the vehicle information display
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
and the center display screen.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
● Text Messaging:
4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust Touch to toggle the text message function-
the following settings as desired: ality on or off.
● Sort Phonebook By: ● Show Incoming Text for:
Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to Touch “Driver” to have incoming text notifi-
choose how phonebook entries are alpha- cations shown in the vehicle information dis-
betically displayed on the screen. play. Select “Both” to have text notifications
shown in both the vehicle information display
● Use Phonebook From:
and the center display screen. Select “Off”
Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s phone-
to turn off all text notifications.
book. Select “SIM” to use the phonebook on
the SIM card. Select “Both” to use both ● Auto Reply:
sources. Touch to toggle the auto reply functionality
on or off.
● Download Phonebook Now:
Touch to download the phonebook to the ● Auto Reply Message:
vehicle from the chosen source. Touch to indicate preferred message to be
sent when “Auto Reply” function is activated.
● Record Name for Phonebook Entry:
Touch to record a name for a phonebook ● Use Vehicle’s Signature:
entry for use with the NISSAN Voice Recog- Touch to toggle on or off the addition of the
nition System. vehicle signature to outgoing messages.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional information,
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.
phone book. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows 4. Voice and display feedback are provided
hands-free operation of the systems equipped on when the command is accepted.
this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation
systems. ● Press the button to return to the pre-
vious screen.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
the button located on the steering wheel. ● If the command is not recognized, the sys-
When prompted, speak the command for the tem announces provides a list of available
system you wish to activate. The command given selections.
is picked up by the microphone and performed ● If you want to cancel the command or go
when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice
back to the previous menu of commands,
Recognition will provide a voice response as well
as a message in the center display to inform you press the button. The system will an-
of the command results. nounce: “Cancelling voice recognition” or
“Go back” depending on the current menu
USING THE SYSTEM LHA2879 level.
Initialization Giving voice commands
● Press the button to move back
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, 1. Press the button. through the menus displayed on the screen.
NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which
takes a few seconds. When completed, the sys- 2. The system announces: “Please say a cat- ● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
tem is ready to accept voice commands. If egory like phone or a command like points of feedback, use the volume control switches
interest followed by a brand name”. A list of on the steering wheel or the volume knob on
the button is pressed before the initializa-
available commands is then spoken by the the control panel.
tion completes, the system will announce: “Voice
system.
Recognition System not ready. Please wait.” ● The voice command screen can also be
3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on accessed using the control panel display:
the display changes, speak a command.
Available commands are discussed else- 1. Press the [ ] button.
where in this section.
2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101


Operating tips How to say numbers
To get the best performance out of NISSAN NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
Voice Recognition, observe the following: way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following examples.
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration “0”.
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
Phone numbers
from recognizing the voice commands cor-
rectly. Speak phone numbers according to the following
example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial number
● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
and then speak the phone number in any of the
command. Otherwise, the command will not
following formats:
be received properly.
● “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”
● Start speaking a command within 3.5 sec- LHA2780
onds after the tone sounds. SYSTEM FEATURES ● “one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing ● “one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh”
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the fol-
between words.
lowing systems: For the best voice recognition phone dialing re-
sults, say phone numbers as single digits. Also,
● Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
full numbers can only be spoken for “800”. For
● Navigation example, you cannot say 555-6000 as “five five
five six thousand”.
● Audio
● Information
● My Apps
● Help
For additional information, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE ● Dial Number ● Read Text
PHONE SYSTEM VOICE Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After Reads an incoming text message.
COMMANDS the number is entered, say “Dial” to initiate ● Send Text
dialing. Say “Correction” to correct the num-
To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone ber entered. Say “Go Back” to return to the Sends a text message.
System voice commands: main menu. ● Select Phone
1. Press the button. ● List Phonebook The system replies “Please use manual con-
2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle trols to continue”. Use manual controls to
Starting with the first alphabetical entry in
phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts change the active phone from among the
“Phone” to access various phone com- for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call listed phones connected to the vehicle.
mands. the number of the phonebook entry. Say For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®
If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the “Send Text” to send a text message to the Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-
system announces: “Bluetooth® is off. Would number of the phonebook entry. Say “Next tem” in this section.
you like to turn Bluetooth® on?” Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry in
the vehicle phonebook, where the same op- NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
If no phone is connected to the system and the tions will then be available. COMMANDS
vehicle is stationary, the system announces:
● Recent Calls The following voice commands are available for
“There is no phone connected. Would you like to
connect a phone now?” Say “Yes” to connect a The system prompts for an additional com- the Navigation System:
phone. All further Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone mand. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” ● Street Address (address)
System voice commands are only available if a or “Outgoing Calls” to display a list of such
phone is connected. calls on the screen. ● Points of Interest (name)

If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is set to Speak the number of the entry displayed on ● POI by Category
“On”, the following voice commands are available: the screen to dial that number or say “Next ● Home
Page” to view entries on the next page (if
● Call (a name) ● Address Book
available).
Speak the name of the contact in which you
● Redial ● Previous Destinations
are trying to call. System will confirm correct
contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing. Redials the last called number. ● Enter Address in Steps
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103
● Cancel Route ● CD Track (number) ● 5 — day Forecast
For additional information, refer to the separate Allows user to select track to be played ● 6 — hour Forecast
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
● Play Song (name) For additional information about these com-
AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE mands, refer to the separate Navigation System
Allows user to select song name to be Owner’s Manual.
COMMANDS played
To access the audio system voice commands: MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS
● Play Artist (name)
1. Press the button. Many Apps can be accessed using this voice
Allows user to select artist to be played command. For additional information, refer to
2. Say “Audio” ● Play Album (name) “NissanConnectSM Mobile Apps” in this section.
3. Speak a command from the following avail- Allows user to select album name to be HELP VOICE COMMANDS
able commands: played The following voice commands can be spoken to
● Play (AM, FM, etc.) For additional information about the audio sys- have the system provide instructions and tips for
Allows user to select radio band tem, refer to “Audio system” in this section. using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
● Tune AM (number) INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS ● List Commands
Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM The following voice commands are available for ● What Can I Say?
frequency the information functions of the Navigation Sys- ● General Help
tem:
● Tune FM (number) ● Quit
● Traffic
Allows user to tune directly to a desired FM ● Exit
frequency ● Fuel Prices
● SXM channel (number) ● Stocks
Allows user to tune directly to a desired ● Movie Listings
SXM station (if so equipped)
● Current Weather
● Weather Map
4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are
listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting
with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message Solution
The system responds “Command Not 1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help” menu.
Recognized” or the system fails to rec- 2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
ognize the command correctly. 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).

NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Starting the engine (models without NISSAN
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Intelligent Key® system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Starting the engine (models with NISSAN
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Intelligent Key® system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
On-pavement and off-road driving Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . 5-18
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 SPORT mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 ECO mode switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Ignition switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . 5-11 BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Push-Button Ignition Switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-12 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) (if so equipped) . . 5-34
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 FEB system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Turning the FEB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 FEB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Chassis Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Active trace control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Active engine brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Active ride control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Fuel efficient driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Hill Descent Control System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-54
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
All-wheel drive (AWD) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
AWD Lock Switch Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING

WARNING EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) ● If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer through
● Do not leave children or adults who WARNING the seal on the liftgate or the body,
would normally require the assistance
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they follow the manufacturer’s recommen-
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
contain colorless and odorless carbon dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-
should also not be left alone. They
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- try into the vehicle.
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of ous. It can cause unconsciousness or ● The exhaust system and body should be
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, death. inspected by a qualified mechanic
temperatures in a closed vehicle could ● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are whenever:
quickly become high enough to cause entering the vehicle, drive with all win- a. The vehicle is raised for service.
severe or possibly fatal injuries to dows fully open, and have the vehicle
people or animals. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
inspected immediately.
entering into the passenger
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or ● Do not run the engine in closed spaces compartment.
straps to help prevent it from sliding or such as a garage.
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than c. You notice a change in the sound of
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- ● Do not park the vehicle with the engine the exhaust system.
lision, unsecured cargo could cause running for any extended length of time.
d. You have had an accident involving
personal injury. ● Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates, damage to the exhaust system, un-
● To avoid raising the center of gravity doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
excessively, do not exceed the rated closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped) gases could be drawn into the passen- THREE-WAY CATALYST
and evenly distribute the load. ger compartment. If you must drive with The three-way catalyst is an emission control
one of these open, follow these device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
precautions: gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
1. Open all the windows. high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
2. Set the air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.

5-2 Starting and driving


● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
WARNING
level. Running out of fuel could cause ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
the engine to misfire, damaging the
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
three-way catalyst. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components. ● Do not race the engine while warming it proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
up. responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
flammable materials such as dry grass, ● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine. trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
telltale.
and cause a fire.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
CAUTION SYSTEM (TPMS) TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
function indicator is combined with the low tire
from leaded gasoline will seriously re- should be checked monthly when cold and in-
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
help reduce exhaust pollutants. the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
mately one minute and then remain continuously
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- tires of a different size than the size indicated on
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
electrical systems can cause overrich function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
you should determine the proper tire inflation
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
pressure for those tires.)
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
able loss of performance or other un- equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire including the installation of replacement or alter-
usual operating conditions are pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
detected. Have the vehicle inspected significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
promptly by a NISSAN dealer. the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
should stop and check your tires as soon as ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire properly.
Starting and driving 5-3
Additional information: ● The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning ● You can also check the pressure of all tires
appears in the vehicle information display (except the spare tire) on the vehicle infor-
● Since the spare tire is not equipped
when the low tire pressure warning light is mation display screen. The order of the tire
with the TPMS, the TPMS does not
illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. pressure figures displayed on the screen
monitor the tire pressure of the spare
The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning corresponds with the actual order of the tire
tire.
turns off when the low tire pressure warning position.
● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle light turns off.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire pres-
is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h).
● The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning sure warning light” in the “Instruments and con-
Also, this system may not detect a sudden
does not appear if the low tire pressure trols” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section of
while driving).
malfunction. this manual.
● The low tire pressure warning light does not
● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
automatically turn off when the tire pressure WARNING
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the ● Radio waves could adversely affect
and the outside temperature. Do not reduce
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be electric medical equipment. Those who
the tire pressure after driving because the
driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to use a pacemaker should contact the
tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside
activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire electric medical equipment manufac-
temperature can lower the temperature of
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure turer for the possible influences before
the air inside the tire which can cause a
gauge to check the tire pressure. use.
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
● The “Tire Pressure Low Add Air” warning the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-
appears each time the ignition switch is nate. If the warning light illuminates, check
placed in the ON position as long as the low the tire pressure for all four tires.
tire pressure warning light remains illumi-
● The Tire and Loading Information label (also
nated.
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label) is located in the
driver’s door opening.

5-4 Starting and driving


● If the low tire pressure warning light ● Since the spare tire is not equipped with Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road not be indicated, the TPMS will not minate.
to a safe location and stop the vehicle function and the low tire pressure warn- Some examples are:
as soon as possible. Driving with under- ing light will flash for approximately
inflated tires may permanently damage 1 minute. The light will remain on after – Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
the tires and increase the likelihood of 1 minute. Contact a NISSAN dealer as frequencies are near the vehicle.
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage soon as possible for tire replacement
could occur and may lead to an accident and/or system resetting. – If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
and could result in serious personal in- being used in or near the vehicle.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
jury. Check the tire pressure for all four – If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
specified by NISSAN could affect the
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the DC/AC converter is being used in or near the
proper operation of the TPMS.
recommended COLD tire pressure vehicle.
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tion label to turn the low tire pressure tire sealant into the tires, as this may Low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, cause a malfunction of the tire pressure the following cases.
replace it with a spare tire as soon as sensors.
● If the vehicle equipped with a wheel and tire
possible. (For additional information, without TPMS.
refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of CAUTION
emergency” section for changing a flat ● If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID
tire.) ● The TPMS may not function properly has not been registered.
when the wheels are equipped with tire
chains or the wheels are buried in snow. ● If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.
● Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win- FCC Notice:
dows. This may cause poor reception of For USA:
the signals from the tire pressure sen-
sors, and the TPMS will not function This device complies with Part 15 of the
properly. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may
Starting and driving 5-5
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this Vehicle set-up ● The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill
device must accept any interference re- Tire Alert under the following conditions:
ceived, including interference that may 1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
– If there is interference from an external
cause undesired operation. 2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift device or transmitter.
lever to the P (Park) position.
NOTE: – The air pressure from the inflation device
3. Place the ignition switch to the ON position. is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
Changes or modification not expressly ap- Do not start the engine.
proved by the party responsible for compli- – There is a malfunction in the TPMS sys-
ance could void the user’s authority to op- Operation tem.
erate the equipment. 1. Add air to the tire. – There is a malfunction in the horn or haz-
For Canada: 2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators ard indicators.
This device complies with Industry Canada will start flashing. – The identification code of the tires pres-
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera- 3. When the designated pressure is reached, sure sensor is not registered to the sys-
tion is subject to the following two condi- the horn beeps once and the hazard indica- tem.
tions: (1) this device may not cause inter- tors stop flashing.
ference, and (2) this device must accept any – The battery of the tire pressure sensor is
interference, including interference that 4. Perform the above steps for each tire. low.
may cause undesired operation of the de- ● If the tire is over-inflated more than ap- ● If the Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate
vice. proximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn due